YFP 093: Highlights from APhA Annual Meeting


Highlights from APhA Annual Meeting

Tim and Tim interview several APhA conference attendees on the floor of the exhibit hall about their personal finance journey and the highlights of this year’s annual meeting.

Join APHA

Join APhA now to gain premier access to YFP facilitated webinars, financial articles, live events, resources, and consultations. APhA members also have access to receive exclusive discounts on YFP products and services. You can join APhA at a 25% discount by visiting www.pharmacist.com/yfp and using coupon code YFP. For more information about our financial resources, visit www.pharmacist.com/financial-education.

Summary

On this week’s podcast episode, Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker interview several APhA 2019 conference attendees on the floor of the exhibit hall about their personal finance journey, as well as learning about their highlights and takeaways from this year’s meeting. Christina Slavonik, the newest YFP team member, shares some of her background and path leading her to become a certified financial planner. Brianne Porter talks about how Eileen McDarg, APhA 2019 keynote speaker, shared ways to practice and build resiliency and how to take care of your mental health as a pharmacist. Brianne also gives an update on her personal finance journey since her podcast appearance on Episode 60. She and her husband purchased YNAB, paid off $12,000 of debt, and began saving for an emergency fund which has brought her peace of mind. Gina, P2 at Virginia Commonwealth College of Pharmacy, joins the podcast after purchasing 7 Figure Pharmacist by Tim Church and Tim Baker. Gina discusses how financial skills aren’t focused on in pharmacy school and is taking personal finance into her own hands. At this year’s conference, Gina mainly attended info sessions and the Rutgers fellowship program roundtables. Kara, P3 at Florida A&M, speaks about how she experienced firsthand the importance of personal finance and of keeping track of money while growing up. Tim, P3 at USC, shares how he’s realized the importance of budgeting and minimizing loans while still in school. Tim and Tim close the episode with a reflection on the conference. Over the last couple of years, they have witnessed personal finance becoming more of an interest for pharmacists and have seen pharmacists increase their knowledge by utilizing resources like YFP.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Tim Ulbrich here with Your Financial Pharmacist, live from APhA with the one and only Tim Baker. Tim, how you doing?

Tim Baker: I’m doing well. How are you, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: Good. Excited to be here in Seattle. We’re live at the booth.

Tim Baker: Yeah, this is crazy.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: This is the first time we’ve done something like this, and I feel like we want to soak up the ambiance that is APhA here in Seattle. Unfortunately, Tim Church is unable to join us, but we have a crack team that’s going to be helping in our booth, Cristina, our new associate planner is here. We’ll probably have her on the podcast a little bit later. But yeah, I’m excited. It’s a lot of buzz in the air, and we had a good opening night last night, lot of people stopping by the YFP booth. So yeah, it’s been good so far.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. It’s going to be a great meeting. We’re excited for not only the exhibit hall, we’re going to be doing some financial roundtables this afternoon with students and new practitioners, talking about budgeting, investing, home buying, student loans. And then we’re going to do a workshop tomorrow afternoon.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: All about goal-setting, finding your why, and budgeting. So all things personal finance and pharmacy, that’s what we do at Your Financial Pharmacist. That’s what we’re doing here at APhA. And a shout out to the partnership that we have with APhA.

Tim Baker: Yeah, absolutely.

Tim Ulbrich: They’ve been a great partner and friend and really helping us spread our mission and message to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I’m really looking forward to — you know, we’re not quite sure what this episode’s going to look like, but I think we’ll splice together some conversations that we have with other APhA conference goers and just get a flavor of what they’re looking for in terms of the conference, maybe some of the things that, you know, are concerns of theirs for their finances. And yeah. I’m just kind of excited about this new format with the conference today.

Tim Ulbrich: So we’re signing off for now, and we’ll be back here live at APhA 2019 in Seattle, Washington.

Tim Baker: What’s up, everybody? Welcome back to APhA 2019 in Seattle. I am with Cristina Slavonik (?), who is the newest member of our YFP team. Cristina joined us about a month ago. She is our new associate financial planner, so she is working with me day in and day out, helping clients with their financial plan. So Cristina, welcome.

Cristina Slavonik: Thank you so much, Tim. So glad to be here.

Tim Baker: So why don’t you tell us a little bit about yourself and how you kind of came to be that newest member of YFP?

Cristina Slavonik: Sure. Well, I do have an extensive background in the financial services industry. Just kind of a brief background, I had training as a bank teller starting out like Tim 15 years ago. Kind of worked my way up through the ranks, worked in the private side where we did wealth management for high net worth clients. And then just recently, you know, got my CFP certification, Certified Financial Planner certification, and was looking to branch out. And one thing I liked about Your Financial Pharmacist is rather than catering to a broad market of people, you guys just focus on the pharmacy niche and what you can do for pharmacy students and those in all the various transitions of that career path with them.

Tim Baker: Well, yeah, and it kind of goes back to that whole idea of, you know, I feel like in a lot of financial planning firms, it’s a master of none, you know, kind of the jack of all trades. If you have a pulse, you can be a client. And for us, you know, we really want to focus in on what are the needs of the pharmacist community? And you know, typically, it’s centered around, you know, just being overwhelmed with the student debt and confused on how to properly budget and save and invest and the whole pain point around I feel like we’re just not progressing financially. So I think like keying in on that and really beyond the foundation of building out the financial plan. So Cristina, what have been your impressions of kind of the conference so far? And what’s that been like for you?

Cristina Slavonik: It’s been real exciting. This is my first conference. And just to see the energy and the inquisitiveness of everyone here, it’s really been quite an educational experience for me just to hear what is really on people’s minds, especially with some of the breakout sessions. We’ve had some really good, thoughtful questions and how people, they’re really trying to get on the right path and, you know, start out on the right foundation with their finances.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I think it’s one of those things that a lot of pharmacy grads, you know, PharmDs, I think there’s a thirst for that, you know, in terms of like, OK, you know, what the heck do we do now? You know? Especially if we’re staring at some debt and, you know, really getting the foundation of a plan going. So I think, you know, what we’re really trying to do is bring some obviously products, you know, services, whether it’s the blog, the book, the podcast, that type of thing, financial planning, to the table and, you know, really assist those on their path to financial freedom. So Cristina, in terms of like, you know, the work that you’re doing with clients kind of day in and day out, you know, what are some of the things that you’re kind of helping us, YFP Planning, what does that look like?

Cristina Slavonik: Sure, yeah. I mainly help with the onboarding process, just making sure that any accounts that are transitioning over, that we have the proper paperwork in place and helping them through that process and also working with their financial behaviors. We do have some surveys that we put out just to kind of educate them on things they can improve on like maybe frugality or their confidence level. And just kind of helping them be better versions of themselves.

Tim Baker: Well, and I think client service is so important. And I love having you as part of the team and really kind of being, you know, another set of eyes and hands to really help clients through the process. And I think, you know, bringing you on as another Certified Financial Planner, another, you know, viewpoint on things, I think it will really grow out our service offering. And I’m really excited to have you on and really, we need to get you more on the podcast.

Cristina Slavonik: Yes.

Tim Baker: And doing your thing. I know you helped Tim Church on the Roth.

Cristina Slavonik: The back door Roth.

Tim Baker: The back door Roth conversion post. So we’re going to be featuring you more and getting your voice heard, so I think people are kind of sick of the Tim, Tim and Tim. So —

Cristina Slavonik: Well, now, we’ve got a female voice.

Tim Baker: We’ve got a female voice, and I did — when I interviewed Cristina, I said, can you change your name to Tim? And that was shot down. So you know, we had to break the mold. And I think it’s all positive going forward. So Cristina, thanks for coming on the podcast, more obviously in the future. And yeah, we’re just signing off for now at APhA 2019 in Seattle, Washington.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Ulbrich here, back live from APhA. Day No. 3 of the APhA annual meeting here in Seattle, Washington. And lucky enough here to have one of our — well, one of my colleagues at The Ohio State University College of Pharmacy and a guest from Episode 060 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, Dr. Breanne Porter. We had her on talking about one new practitioner’s lessons learned accruing $224,000 of debt in seven years and lucky to have her here alongside of me at the APhA meeting. How’s the meeting going so far?

Breanne Porter: Hi, Tim. It’s going well. Thanks for having me.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Breanne Porter: It’s very exciting.

Tim Ulbrich: Thanks for stopping by. You did an episode, Episode 060, that I have referenced often and I would highly encourage our listeners, go back there, check that out. It’s very inspiring.

Breanne Porter: OK.

Tim Ulbrich: I think you were very raw and genuine in the journey you’ve gone through and the lessons that you’ve learned. And I know you’re passionate about this topic and making sure others are on the track to financial success, right?

Breanne Porter: Yeah, that is correct. Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So talk me through, you just came out of the main session this morning at APhA, all about resilience. So talk to me about what that session was about and the author of the book and the person facilitating that.

Breanne Porter: Yeah, so the keynote this morning was on resilience, and they had Eileen McDargh I think is how she says her last name. And she was really inspiring because she came in basically and, you know, we were talking a lot about mental health and some of these topics can be a little heavy. But really, what she shared with us were some basic practices and things that we can do on a daily basis to really help build that resilience. She talked about how it, in some ways, people may be more genetically predisposed. But it really is a practice that we can all work on to sort of build in our day-to-day and really become a little more resilient in the day-to-day. So it was very helpful.

Tim Ulbrich: And we got to kick the negativity out of our lives. Right?
Breanne Porter: Yes, yes. One of her practices is no red ants. So the people that suck the negative — that have the negative energy and suck it out of you, suck out your energy, basically. You’re not allowed to have them in your life. So no red ants.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that because I think that we all know just from being in the workplace, no matter where you are, I mean, that is such a factor of the culture of a workplace. And I think we underestimate the attitude and what we bring into the office each and every day impacts everybody around us. And that’s true at home, I mean, that’s true with family and so many other things. This topic of resilience, to me, is such an important one. We often talked about it on an admissions standpoint when we were admitting pharmacy students. You know, how do we assess resilience? Because we know in the students we work with, those that have it, and wherever it comes from and however you can find it, they’re going to be able to fight through, they’re going to be able to self-assess, figure out where they’re struggling, improve upon. We see in residency all the time, and I think it’s also true with personal finance. I mean, when people are coming out of school and you’re struggling with student loan debt and all these competing priorities, there’s a lot to work through. And so I think that topic of resilience is a good one. So again, that is Eileen McDargh, right?

Breanne Porter: Yes, McDargh. Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: And the book is called, “Your Resiliency GPS” if anyone wants to check it out. We would highly encourage you to do so. I’m going to be reading it soon, so I’m excited about that. So since we had you on in Episode 060, you shared that journey. And as I mentioned, we’ve highlighted that story. So what are some of the things that you’re working on right now in your own financial journey?

Breanne Porter: That’s a great question, actually. I feel like I’ve made a lot of strides. I’m very proud and excited. So I’m happy to share with the group. But we recently purchased YNAB, my husband and I recently purchased YNAB.

Tim Ulbrich: Love YNAB, by the way.

Breanne Porter: It stands for You Need a Budget, so as straightforward as it can be. We purchased that about six months ago, I think. And since then, we’ve paid off almost $12,000 in debt.

Tim Ulbrich: Wow, congratulations.

Breanne Porter: Yep. Thank you. We’re very proud of that. We started saving towards some goals. We have a huge emergency fund, which is great because I’m pretty sure I’m going to be paying out taxes now, as soon as I file with Tim Baker and his company. But yeah, basically, we’ve just really been able to I think, you know, become more confident in our financial health and really feel more comfortable. Because, you know, things happen now. I had a dog emergency the other day, my dog consumed 15 ounces of dark chocolate and had to spend a night at MedVet. And you know, a year ago, I would have just been carrying that balance for months, probably. And it felt so good to be able to just hand over the cash and be done with it.

Tim Ulbrich: You can’t put a dollar amount to that peace of mind, right?

Breanne Porter: No. Oh my gosh, no. I sleep so much better every night just knowing that I’ve paid off the debt but also, I have that money aside now too. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I’m with you. And that’s a hard thing. We talk so much about the numbers, but when you talk about peace of mind, you talk about being on the same page with your spouse, when you talk about defining your goals and knowing you’re working toward achieving them, like that’s the stuff that really matters. And what I love about your journey and thinking about where you kind of came in a very passive participant in your financial journey to a very excited, motivated participant in your own journey. I mean, that’s really what it’s all about. You caught fire with it, and we often at Ohio State, we end up in financial discussions. People have to hear us talking about budgeting and other stuff. So thank you so much for sharing that update. And again, for those that didn’t listen, go back and check out Episode 060 of the podcast where Breanne shares a lot of her story. So have a great rest of your meeting.

Breanne Porter: Thanks, Tim. You too.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m here with Gina, who is a P2 at Virginia Commonwealth University College of Pharmacy, VCU School of Pharmacy, and here back at the APhA meeting, excited to have you stop alongside the booth. You just purchased a copy of “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” grateful for that, so thank you.

Gina: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: So tell us a little bit about yourself, where you’re at obviously in your journey of pharmacy school and how the meeting’s going so far here at APhA.

Gina: Yeah. As Tim said, I am a P2. I’m currently looking to pursue a professional residency or a fellowship.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Gina: I’m not too sure yet. But definitely I’m also interested in compounding as well. I picked up the “Seven Figure Pharmacist” book because I was interested in — well first off, schools don’t really touch upon financial skills. We do host occasional lectures and talks, but I feel like this is definitely an essential skill. It’s important to have a job, but it’s rather how to utilize that such as like investing and all. And I figure I don’t have much background on that personally, so that’s kind of what I’m hoping to get out of that book.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Gina: Especially to prepare myself for graduation.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And I’m so excited to hear you energized about this topic as a P2. You know, as I think back on my journey, part of the pain that I had paying back $200,000 of student loan debt is I wasn’t thinking about it early enough. So you know, the fact that you’re thinking about this early tells me that you’re passionate about learning and that will be everything in terms of your journey. And so establishing that principle of learning early on is so important. So kudos to you for investing in that. It’s an important thing to do.

Gina: Thank you. I mean, especially in this day and age, you know, tuitions are rising with any school, undergrad especially. Yeah, it’s definitely an important skill. It’s the future.

Tim Ulbrich: So here we are at the APhA meeting. So how’s the meeting been going? What’s been your favorite parts of the meeting so far?

Gina: Good. I’m a student, I’ve attended info sessions on — for example, I just came back from the Rutgers Fellowship Program roundtables, and that was pretty informative. Other educational sessions included like dietary supplements, contraceptives, etc. Yeah, it was pretty eye-opening.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Gina: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Great meeting. It’s been beautiful here out in Seattle. And I know coming from the East Coast, the travel certainly can be exhausting. But it’s a great, great city here in Seattle.

Gina: Oh yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you so much again for just taking time. Thank you for your support of the work that we’re doing. And best of luck to you going forward.

Gina: Thank you. Thank you for having me.

Tim Ulbrich: Back at the exhibit hall here at APhA 2019 in Seattle. Excited to be here with Cara from Florida A&M University. And she stopped by the booth yesterday, had purchased a copy of “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” was so excited about it, we did a little recording. And we found out the audio wasn’t working. So she’s back today. So thank you for joining.

Cara: No problem at all. It’s a pleasure.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. So tell me a little about yourself, what year you are in pharmacy school and how your meeting’s going so far.

Cara: So I’m a P3 student from Florida A&M, and my meeting is — the meeting’s going amazing. You really get to network. And that’s so important in this job field right now.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. So this topic of personal finance, I can tell in just my short interactions with you, it’s something you’re very passionate about.

Cara: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: You told me that you are adamant on not being broke, right?

Cara: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: We’ve talked about stories of many pharmacists that go through this process, accrue lots of student loans, have a good income but feel like they’re living paycheck to paycheck because of student loans and other competing priorities. So tell me about your desires going forward and why you’re so motivated about this topic.

Cara: So I’m motivated, first of all, my mom was a single mother, and I saw that it seemed like she was working as hard as she could, and she was sacrificing so much and still could barely make ends meet. And there’s no reason for that. She didn’t do as much as she could for me to turn around and do the same thing. It’s always you’re supposed to grow.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Cara: So it’s important to have financial literacy. And she really pushed to me, like hey, you need to count your coins.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, absolutely. And I think, you know, what I love in my talking with you just for a short time, you have caught fire on this topic.

Cara: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: And what I’ve seen is once people have that passion for learning, it’s game on. And a pharmacist’s income alone is good, but it’s not going to equal financial success alone. Or you’ve got to take that income and put it into work. We talk a lot about people that are income affluent but that haven’t turned that into balance sheet affluent. So it’s got to be able to transform that income into wealth. So I’m excited for you and for your journey. And while we’re here, I’m going to do a quick shoutout for Dean Johnnie Early at Florida A&M University, just left us in Toledo, Ohio, and went down there. So thank you so much for your time. And I hope you have a great rest of your meeting.

Cara: Thank you so much.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Thank you.

Tim Ulbrich: I’ve got Tim here with me, a P3 from USC College of Pharmacy, and grateful for the opportunity to have you here for a couple minutes. Yesterday, you stopped by the booth. I was trying to talk you into doing some podcasting and you were a little bit nervous, but here we are, back today, and you’ve come back. So I appreciate your time.

Tim: Sure. Thank you for having me here.

Tim Ulbrich: How’s your meeting going?

Tim: It’s pretty great. It’s my third day, and I have met a lot of people and going to different booths here at the exposition as well as go to the research and poster presentations. I think that was cool as well. And being a delegate for Rho Chi and PLS. Also, I have never been a delegate before, so that’s also a new experience for me.

Tim Ulbrich: So it’s been a busy meeting. And I just found out that you are flying home very early morning tomorrow, getting into the LAX airport, and driving to USC to take a final exam. So it’s dedication for you to be here at APhA, investing in your professional development, which I’m excited to hear. And I can tell you’re excited about this topic of personal finance as well. So tell me what’s top of mind for you when it comes to personal finance as a current student and thinking ahead to making that transition into new practitioner life.

Tim: I think it’s very important to start early. As you know, currently interest, they may accrue, they don’t charge it. I don’t like making more interest.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes, baby interest. Capitalization.

Tim: Yes, they’re not being capitalized.

Tim Ulbrich: We call it baby interest.

Tim: Oh, OK. Then I’m making baby interest, but it’s just accruing. So I think it’s important now to start budgeting, see where I’m spending my money and try to minimize all the expenses that I don’t need so that I can minimize my loans and hopefully have not too much loans, especially attending university, so.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, try to minimize some of that stress later on.

Tim: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m glad to hear you say, we talk a lot about that while somebody’s in school, it can very much feel like Monopoly money. And you don’t realize the impact of how that interest is growing.

Tim: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: And then to your point, once you get into active repayment, that interest grows on the principal, and that starts growing interest, which is that process of capitalization.

Tim: Yes, exactly.

Tim Ulbrich: So for the students that are listening to this, anything you can do, Tim’s got good advice here. Minimize the amount that you’re borrowing, of course sometimes it’s easier said than done.

Tim: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: Ultimately, you’re trying to minimize that principal balance as well as the interest that’s accruing to minimize what you’re going to have to pay in active repayment. So USC College of Pharmacy, one of the top programs in the country. Tim Baker and I actually had a chance to come out there last year, talk with students, very impressed with the campus, top notch students — and I’m not just saying that to say that. We left that weekend just very impressed with the USC brand, the level of students, the caliber of the students, so I wish you the best of luck. And thank you for coming onto the show.

Tim: Of course. Thank you for having me, and thank you for coming last year. We really enjoyed you being there and teach us about finance.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. Thank you.

Tim: Thank you.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Ulbrich here, back on the floor of APhA in the exhibit hall with Tim Baker. We are wrapping APhA Annual 2019. Wow.

Tim Baker: Already.

Tim Ulbrich: Already, right? It’s been a great meeting.

Tim Baker: It went by really quickly. Yeah, it just seems like so much buzz this year around our booth and I think the topic of personal finance. APhA, like I said, puts on a good show here. Yeah, it’s been great. I don’t know, Tim, I feel like coming out of these conferences, I just get so charged up even not being a pharmacist myself but just, you know, about — I know there’s going to be some negativity at times about the profession of pharmacy, but I just get super jacked up coming from these types of meetings and going forward. And you know, for us, trying to find better ways to do what we do in terms of providing product and service for pharmacists with regard to their personal finance needs.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And there’s been a ton of energy around the topic of personal finance. And you know, I feel like thinking back to 2015 when we kind of started the journey, like one of the things we kept saying is we want to move the needle on this conversation.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: About personal finance. And I feel like, you know, we’re of course biased, right? We love this. But I feel like the awareness and knowledge of students and new practitioners — and we’ve talked with faculty members, and we’ve talked with others — the terminology, I mean, things I hear students talking about.

Tim Baker: It’s unbelievable.

Tim Ulbrich: Understanding refinance and budgeting, loan forgiveness. Like, we didn’t hear that 3-4 years ago. And I think we’re seeing that needle shift a little bit.

Tim Baker: You know, it’s funny. I was talking to a pharmacist today, and she came up and actually she’s right behind us in our booth here. She works for the FDA, and she’s like, “Hey, what do you think about like that married filing separately if I’m going for PSLF and my spouse isn’t?” And I’m like, wow. Before it was, what’s an income-driven plan. And now, we’re talking about oh yeah, I’m optimizing my PSLF strategy here. I’m doing this or that or refi or — it’s unbelievable. And you know, I don’t know if we can take full credit for that, but I think, you know, I think the fact of the matter is that there is absolutely more of an awareness than it was a couple years ago. And I think it’s a credit to our listenership and really, the students and the new practitioners out there that are really being intentional and looking at this stuff. And it’s super easy, as you can attest to, to not be.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, absolutely.

Tim Baker: And to kind of wander off or stick your head in the sand. So you know, that just jacks me up. And I love that, and I think, you know, I’m looking forward to next year’s conference in D.C. because I want to see even more of like the evolution from where we’re at today.

Tim Ulbrich: I couldn’t agree more. And I think the excitement and the energy around, you know, caring about this topic and, you know, we help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. That’s what we do. And we’re missing Tim Church out here.

Tim Baker: We are.

Tim Ulbrich: Because you know, we’re feeling this energy and this vision and what we’re doing is just as much a part of him as it is us and his contribution to that. So Tim Church, shoutout to you.

Tim Baker: He’ll probably be ready to run through a wall there, you know.

Tim Ulbrich: You’re right, he would. What you said to me that really resonated that I’m feeling is intentionality. I mean, we did some roundtables yesterday, and we talked about budgeting and, you know, finding your why and thinking about goals and all these other things. And I felt like the context of budgeting and seeing a group excited about, you know what, a budget doesn’t have to restrictive. A budget doesn’t have to be something that holds you back. A budget is about putting you in a position to achieve the goals that you really want to achieve, like that really is what this whole thing is all about. And that’s exciting.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I think when you can reframe the mindset of like, you know, thinking of a budget as like, ‘oh, I don’t want to, it’s restrictive,’ to a budget allows you to really achieve the why and you know, to take the trips that you want to and to achieve financial independence when you want and that type of thing. It’s like, when you back it in, when you look at it that way, it becomes dare I say fun. It becomes more — you get more and more momentum when you’re working towards those goals and the budget really is the means to the end of that. And I think just there’s a — it’s almost like the “b” word is a dirty word. But I think it can be a very positive thing, you know, if you really ask those reflective questions of what is the point of all of this? Like what is the point of making this income of paying down these debts? You know? When I talk with clients and I ask those questions, it’s typically not like, oh, I wish I would have funded my Roth IRA. You know, looking back, it’s more like, I wish I would have done these things with my family or I wish I would have ventured out on my own and did something in business or whatever. And I think like, get excited about that. That, to me, is that encouraging thing. Like build a life plan and have the financial plan really support it.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, we preach, obviously, principles to build wealth. But our goal is to equally preach what leads to a wealthy life.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s so important for us and at least from my viewpoint, that’s what’s so incredible about being a part of this journey is to be able to see people unlock what matters most to them. And we’re getting ready to head into our last session here this afternoon where we’re going to talk with new practitioners all about that concept of, here you are as a new practitioner, you just graduated, you’ve got all these competing priorities. So what? What is this all about? And can we define that so that when we get into the nitty gritty of the financial plan and the budget and all of that, that we’ve got purpose, we’ve got direction, and we know why we’re being intentional. So as we wrap up APhA 2019 here in Seattle, Washington, just another shout out to the American Pharmacists Association, we appreciate their partnership. You know, it’s been so fun seeing the energy of students and new practitioners and others here at the meeting, looking at how can we better the profession, how can we evolve the profession? And we’re excited for what lies ahead in this partnership. We’ve got a webinar coming up in the month of April around home buying. We’ve got new content coming throughout the rest of the year. We’re going to do some more live events, the Day of New Practitioner Life this summer in Washington in July. So for those that are not familiar with the work we’re already doing, Pharmacists.com/YFP. For those that are APhA members, you can log in, access the catalog of webinars and other content that we’ve done. For those that are not a member, you can use the coupon code AYFP19, AYFP19, to get 20% off your membership. So Tim, it’s been a lot of fun.

Tim Baker: Yeah, same. Looking forward to next year.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 088: Introducing YFP Planning!


Introducing YFP Planning!

On this episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, YFP Co-founders Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker announce some exciting news as it relates to the launch of YFP Planning, talk through the benefits of financial planning for pharmacists and reminisce on the origins of Your Financial Pharmacist.

Summary

On this episode, Tim and Tim dive right into an exciting announcement regarding the launch of YFP Planning. YFP Planning provides comprehensive fee only financial planning services now as part of Your Financial Pharmacist. Formerly Script Financial, YFP Planning covers anything that has to do with your financial situation including cash flow, budgeting, insurance, retirement, tax preparation, and estate planning.

Tim Baker, CFP and head of YFP Planning, shares that financial success and wealth were based off of an old equation that is now a myth. The old method of thinking focused on being income statement affluent where a high income is made, however you have no savings to show for it. Conversely, balance sheet affluence is where money flows in and actually sticks so you can save for a purpose.

Comprehensive financial planning forces you to look at your current financial state and make moves to better it. This can be especially helpful for pharmacists who typically have higher incomes and a lot of student loan and credit card debt. YFP Planning doesn’t just provide you with information on how to pay off your loans, save money, or create a budget, but instead also offers accountability and coaching. Having someone offering an objective approach to your financial situation helps you to see the whole picture and pushes you to take the steps you need to reach your goals.

The YFP Planning process starts of with a free discovery meeting where the YFP Planning team learns more about you. If you decide to move ahead with YFP Planning, the first meeting focuses on getting organized. Then, another meeting is scheduled to discuss your goals and dig deeper into some questions you may have not asked yourself about your financial situation or goals.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to Episode 088 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Excited to be here with Tim Baker after we’ve had a series of side hustles represented by the one and only Tim Church. He’s doing a great job with that series, the side hustle series, so if you haven’t listened to those, check those out. Tim Baker, welcome back to the show. It’s been awhile since we recorded. I think — what? The New Year Game Plan back in Episode 081.

Tim Baker: I know. It’s actually crazy, like I think — not to be a broken record, but it’s actually nice to be like a listener and to hear all of these inspiring people come on and just the work that you’re doing and Church is doing on the podcast, like it’s really cool to see. Yeah, things have been good, been super, super busy, lots of things going on. But yeah, excited to be back on the podcast today.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m with you on that one. I kind of like the surprise of like an episode going online and get to see it as a listener and hearing the past couple weeks and being inspired by some of the pharmacists out there doing some awesome side hustle stuff. So we’ve got more of that coming also in the new year. So lots going on in your world and the tax prep, right? So we just did a webinar recently. And tell us more about what’s going on in that arena.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so one of the things that I really was thinking about in terms of like Script Financial and really providing great service to our clients is what are some things that really, we have to work through and really deal with every year? And it’s really tax. So before, you know, obviously, I’m a CFP, and a major component of that is tax, but I really wanted to learn more and look at ways to almost start a tax business as part of this Script Financial. And when the things with the Tims all kind of took off, I kind of set that aside. But I was lucky enough to have Paul Eichenberg, who’s a member of my team, who has experience with tax, become part of the team and really offer that as a service to our clients. So last night, we did our first webinar, our first YFP webinar. And it was great. We had great attendance and just kind of a learning experience for us on the webinar side. But yeah, we’re super excited to roll that out for clients. So when clients work with me, comprehensive is just kind of included in their fees, so every year, we’re doing a little bit of tax prep, which is kind of what we’re going through right now, this time of year. And really, kind of the planning that I’m a big believer in that, hey, halfway through the year, let’s take a look and do a projection and make sure that we’re not paying Uncle Sam too much or getting a refund back or whatever that looks like. So yeah, big changes, but very exciting. And just excited to roll that out.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Yeah, you guys have been doing great work there. Shoutout to Paul, I think he’s doing an awesome job leading that. And for those that are listening that aren’t yet clients, if you want to learn more about that service, YourFinancialPharmacist.com/tax. And as Tim mentioned, that’s both inclusive of the filing part but also the strategy part of looking ahead to say, what can we be doing to maximize the tax situation heading into 2019? So Tim, we’ve got some exciting news to share on today’s episode alongside a discussion we’re going to have on the decision to hire a financial planner. One of the most common questions that we get — and we’re also going to be reminiscing along the way about our journey as we both individually reflect back on all of the things that have happened really leading up to this moment. And I think it’s — to be frank, I’ve been kind of giddy about this because, you know, when you and I met just a few years ago, I feel like really, the culmination of that vision is coming together. And it’s been a really, really fun ride. So before we start getting too sentimental, Tim Baker, let’s cut to the chase. Give us the good news. What’s the announcement?

Tim Baker: Yeah. So the big change is that Script Financial, which I just talked about, which I launched way back when in 2016 is now YFP Planning. So this has kind of been kind of in the works, so Script Financial is now part of the Your Financial Pharmacist brand. It’s just super exciting. I know Tim, like when I think back when we met, you know, via Twitter way back when, I never imagined that it would kind of lead our paths to this, but it just made sense in terms of kind of our beliefs and I think what we’re really trying to do in terms of empowering pharmacists and pharmacy students to really take control of their finances. So whether it is the blog or the podcast or a course or doing your taxes or comprehensive financial planning, which is kind of my bread and butter, you know, we felt like basically having that under one brand and one mantle made the most sense, so I’m giddy as well. I’m super excited about I think where we can really take this and I think with good feedback from our listenership and readers and all that basically YFP subscribers to kind of listen to what is needed and adapt. And I think one of the things that really was a catalyst for me to leave kind of the traditional financial planning firm was, you know, there wasn’t really a lot of planning out there for young professionals or individuals that were dealing with student debt or just cash flow and budgeting. So I think in that same breath, we always want to make sure that we’re adapting to the needs of the community and what’s out there and what pharmacists are dealing with. So I’m just super excited to really get going on this and kind of do this relaunch of the brand.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I’m with you on that. And one of the most common questions we get is, hey, do you guys offer comprehensive financial planning? And for our listeners, here’s the answer. Yes, yes we do. So YFPPlanning.com is the launch of the site. So if you’ve been hearing us talk about Script Financial, Tim’s brand and company, we all are now one entity. So YourFinancialPharmacist.com, you can get there as well or directly at YFPPlanning.com. And I think this really, for me, as I mentioned before, is a culmination of the vision that we had when we sat down at Bob Edmund’s on I-71 in Mansfield, Ohio, and I was actually there with Jess and the boys recently, and I was kind of — I mean, she probably was looking at me like, why are you staring off into the distance?

Tim Baker: Get a little teary-eyed.

Tim Ulbrich: Got a little teary-eyed, I was looking at the booth where we sat and had my boys there, and it was just kind of a cool moment. But just sharing that vision of like, you know, we are so passionate about helping pharmacists in this area, and I think our vision at the time was, hey, everything A to Z. Everything from debt to budgeting to investing to estate planning in all forms and fashions, we want to be involved with pharmacy and helping people along that journey toward financial freedom, which for everyone means something different. And we had this vision that whether you want to come to YourFinancialPharmacist.com and check out our free resources and calculators, which we have a ton out there, or you feel like financial planning’s a great fit for you, we’ve got that all now in one place. So let me ask you the obvious question because I think it’s worth digging in a little bit deeper is, what does comprehensive financial planning mean? Because I think we throw that out there, and the industry, as we’ve talked about before in Episodes 015, 016 and 017, you know, is very different in terms of what you’ll get for that service. So for you and for us, what does that term mean?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think I look at it as if it has a dollar sign, we’ll work through it. To me, if I’m hiring a professional to help me with my finances, I want someone — I want there to be someone in my corner that has my back, that has my best interests in mind, which unfortunately, the way the industry is set up, that’s not always the case. So I think we’re touching on all of the things that are related to the financial plan, more specifically, things like debt management and kind of your fundamentals and cash flow and insurance and retirement and estate. But there are going to be things that are beyond that, those life events that come up, and I think it’s just really important to have someone that understands what your goals are and kind of understands really the technical piece of the financial plan and point you in the right direction. You know, so much of kind of the old equation or the old guard of financial planning was to push product. Hey, you’re a pharmacist or a doctor, here’s a life insurance policy that, you know, is probably going to pay me a lot of commission or a disability policy or an investment. And I’ll talk to you once a year. That’s not necessarily, you know, the model that we employ. So I think that the idea that a lot of things in life, even in the financial services, is becoming more and more of a commodity. So you know, really what we’re focused on is kind of bringing that life plan that fits the view of what your view of a wealthy life is and have the finances really support that. Typically, most people don’t — they don’t accumulate wealth for the sake of accumulating wealth. It’s for, you know, the fact that they want to retire at age 50 or they want to have this vacation home in the woods somewhere. So that’s really the idea is to connect the dots with, OK, what is a wealthy life? And then how do we get there? And that’s, to me, that’s what fires me up.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Love it. You know, Tim, one of the things that stands out to me is over the Facebook YFP Book Club right now, we’re working through the book, “The Next Millionaire Next Door,” by — we’ve talked about it on this podcast — Dr. Tom Stanley, Dr. Sarah Fallaw, which reminds me of our journey and our beliefs to buck the status quo and complacency that’s out there when it comes to achieving financial freedom and building wealth. And the one takeaway that I remember from this book and the first one that was published back in the ‘90s is that this old equation of high income=success is a myth. It’s a false reality. But so many pharmacists, myself included at one point, really subscribe to this false reality. So tell us more about this old equation and how you see pharmacists kind of falling into this trap.

Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s kind of what they talk about when we talk about income statement affluent versus balance sheet affluent. So essentially, income statement affluent — and I see this a lot where, you know, you have a household that makes $200,000, $300,000, $400,000 or whatever that looks like and have nothing to show for it: have no savings, have credit card debt, and essentially, the money, the household’s like a siv, the money comes right in and goes right out. Balance sheet affluent — and I’ve seen this even with residents who make $40,000 or $50,000 or incomes of less than $100,000 — balance sheet affluent are those people that when the money flows in, it actually sticks. And you’re saving for the purpose of retirement or a kid’s education or whatever it is. So the reality is that you’re spending, you know, for a lot of people, a lot of people will say, “Hey, I wish I could make a little bit more. I wish I could get a 10% raise, and then all of my concerns could be put at ease.” But the reality is and the psychology shows us that most people, their spending rises with really their income. So you know, if I double your salary tomorrow, a lot of people will double their spending. So the old equation is, you know, basically is when you follow traditional advice, you should really enjoy your income and really live for today, and we see that in society as being — we very much live on credit and we spend, spend, spend, you know, car payments, a big mortgage, that type of thing where what we really want to do — and it often leads to things that give us stress, so I’m thinking back to Jessica Louie about clutter and things like that. A lot of it is very near-term, like satisfaction of like, oh, this is awesome. But then we just surround ourselves — and I’ve been this way in my life in the past where I’m like, I just have all this stuff that I really don’t like or want that just causes more stress. So I think, you know, the idea is we want to make sure that we are being intentional. We talk about being intentional with our spending. And develop a savings plan that allows you to allocate dollars for the things that mean the most, whether that is a vacation to the Pacific Northwest, whether that is a vacation home in the woods or a trip to Paris, France. Those are really the things that I think are what I talk about life plan that are more important.

Tim Ulbrich: Amen. Preach it, Tim Baker.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Preach. You know, it’s interesting because we just finished up “Rich Dad, Poor Dad,” in the book club, and now we’re reading “The Next Millionaire Next Door,” and that wasn’t intentional, but two very — I don’t know if different is the right word — but just very philosophically — you know, “Rich Dad, Poor Dad,” to me is all about growing the asset line and thinking about real estate and those types of things.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that “The Millionaire Next Door” focuses much more on frugality and cutting expenses, both of which are very important. And Jess and I were having a conversation the other night is you put the two of those concepts together, and boom. It’s like, game on, right?

refinance student loans

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: And I was even thinking back to this old equation, thinking back to 2009, you know, Jess and I had over $200,000 of student loan debt, we had a house with almost no equity, we soon had a growing family to support with the loss of one of our incomes because she was going to be staying home. And we realized that despite all of the amazing opportunities that have been afforded to us, there’s really little discussed truth among practitioners, ourselves included, in this field about how to manage this. And I think many pharmacists listening find themselves in exactly the same boat. And so as you meet with pharmacists or residents or fellows or students, what are some of the most common frustrations and things that you’re hearing from them?
Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s a great question. And typically, when I meet with a prospective client, I’ll lay out essentially three things. And I’ll say, “Hey, Tim,” — you know, typically, when a pharmacist such as yourself comes to speak with me about their finances, they share one of a few things. It could be “I’m overwhelmed with student debt,” or even credit card debt, I’m seeing that more and more, this credit card debt. “I am confused how to properly budget, save and invest in my future.” And that’s kind of a broad, that’s a broader one. But it typically hits for most people. And the last one is, you know, “I’m frustrated by the fact that I make a good income, but I’m not progressing financially.” And kind of this idea of living paycheck-to-paycheck and maybe not enjoying kind of their work because they could be stuck in that work because they need that income, that type of thing. So there’s a lot — and typically, when I kind of go through those pain points, a lot of pharmacists look at me and then they say, “You just described me. Like you’re three-for-three.” So I think it hits on a point a lot of kind of what we’re talking about with empowering pharmacists to really get going on this because you can meander in life and wake up when you’re 45, 55, and really have nothing to show for it. It’s really that easy to do. So I think like part of what we do at YFP Planning now is really, we kind of force you to look at it. We meet quite often, so we almost like force you to really look at that, look at the kind of your current state and make moves to better it. And really examine — we often don’t do enough self-reflection, not just about finances but about life in general. You know, so when I say, “Hey, Tim, what does success look like in five years?” what I often see is, “Wow, that’s a really good question. I never really thought about that.” And then the other things I see, particularly between spouses is kind of like that rubberneck, like I can’t believe that these are the things that you want in five years or that type of thing. And again, it’s hard for us to imagine our five-year-older self, and essentially what I do with clients that if you’re 30 right now, you’re 35, I’m like, imagine when you’re 35 or 40, and put yourself in that place. So I think like the pain points are definitely real, and it’s easy to put your head in the sand and kind of not look at it and just live with it, but I think the sooner that we can kind of get a plan in place, the better. And hopefully, we can do that for you.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think just to build on that, Tim, one of the things I see, I’m sure you see it more often that people often come up to me after a talk or ask a question, and they’ll describe that “I really want to pay off my $200,000 student loans,” or “I really want to save $4 million for retirement.” But when I ask that next-level question of why or what’s motivating you or what’s going to keep you going, there really isn’t much thought there, right? And I think that goes to the point of visualization and thinking about not only your why but where you see yourself in five or 10 or 15 years. And what would be the negative impact if you didn’t do this? Or what are you hoping to achieve by doing this? And I think that gets to the point of accountability and coaching. And one of the things that excites me as we think about YFP Planning is that for the past few years on YFP at YourFinancialPharmacist.com, we’ve been providing a ton of information — and a shoutout here to Tim Church, who has done an unbelievable job.

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: The guides, the checklists, the calculators, the blogs, the podcasts. But what I’m getting to here is it’s not just about information. I’ve seen this firsthand with Jess and I working with you that I read on this topic all the time, but at the end of the day, if I don’t have an accountability partner or a coach, things may not get done. And you know, there’s a quote out there. It says, “If information was the answer, then we’d all be millionaires with perfect abs,” right? So you know, talk to me about accountability and coaching. And I think often, there’s this misperception that hey, my financial planner’s going to help me get x return on my investments when really, maybe the accountability and the coaching is the more important piece.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think like when I look at it, you know, I kind of go through like when I more or less explain to a client what we do, a lot of it is kind of touching on the different parts of the financial plan, but I almost say like at the end of it, like crumble all that up and throw it away because really, I think the value that we provide is kind of the ongoing coaching and accountability. The technical side of it is important, but you think about even like in pharmacy, like it’s important that you know your stuff, but a lot of it is adherence, right? You want to make sure that your patients are taking their medication and all that kind of stuff. So like it’s the same thing as like I could give — what I tell clients often is just because life is so busy, I could give you the most well thought out, awesome financial plan. Most people will read it, say, “Hey, that’s nice.” And they’ll throw it on the shelf, and nothing ever gets done. So I think what we try to do is provide some, you know, where we have a client portal and we try to put those tasks back into the client portal, that pings them and reminds them. And really, again, the fact that we meet frequently, we’re trying to always push the ball forward and cross those things off the list, whether it’s getting your will done or insurance in place or setting up this Ally account for the purposes of Paris, France, which I want them to label it as “Paris, France,” even if it sits empty for two years. I don’t care. I want that there, ready to receive money when that happens. So I think that — I think that the accountability is important. But I also put a heavy premium on the objectivity. So you know, if we take you and Jess as an example, you guys view money differently. So sometimes, it’s good to have someone that has an objective opinion that says, “Hey, these are what my thoughts are, and this is my advice.” So I think if you couple the objectivity and kind of the objective approach to the financial plan with the kind of the ongoing coaching and accountability, it’s a deadly combination. And that’s what I think that often falls short with a lot of other advisors, so sometimes I’ll ask a prospective client, “Hey, who ultimately is going to make the decision? Is it you? Is it you and your spouse? Is it you and a Yoda in your life? What does that look like?” And a lot of times, you know, people will say, “Well, I really respect my dad’s opinion.” They have an advisor, and that’s an objection I kind of have to overcome because most of the time, dad’s advisor is not going to understand or really value what we do because dad’s advisor will typically — you’ll pay based on the assets that are invested and then maybe — and if they don’t have minimums like $250,000 or $100,000 minimums, and they will work with a younger professional, then they talk to you once or twice a year. That’s not our model. We’re very different. So it’s not an apples-to-apples approach. So again, I think the coaching and the accountability part is such a big part of that that I think it’s a differentiating factor between us and other financial planners.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, hopefully this is a feel-good for you, but as you were talking right then, I just started making a list of all of the things that Jess and I accomplished in the last three months that I’m confident we either would not have done or would not have done as quickly without your accountability and coaching. So I’m sure I’m missing some, but we’re back on track with our zero-based budget, using YNAB, we got the estate planning documents wrapped up, emergency fund is back to full fund after we moved recently, we worked through plussing up our disability and life insurance policies, umbrella insurance policies, we worked through lowering fees on investments, asset allocation of accounts, and setting up our savings sheet with our sinking funds. And even to your point earlier, some of those have a $0 but are a reminder of the goals that we have, right? So we have some real estate goals at $0 right now. That’s not the point. The point is it’s a reminder of the goal that we’re trying to get to and because of that, even at $0, it’s something that Jess and I are talking about. So that’s the power of accountability right there. Would I have done those things did I have the knowledge to do them? Yes. Would I have executed? Maybe yes, maybe no. And that matters.

Tim Baker: Well, it makes my heart happy. And you guys are great clients, so I think that, yeah, I think that it’s good feedback. Now, the 403b that we have in transit, that’s a work in progress. I’ll talk to you about that today. But you know, there’s always things that, you know — and again, it’s kind of like an ebb and flow. So it’s never going to be clean-cut in terms of like, hey, we knocked this out. Things are going to change in life. And imagine like in your life alone, what has changed over this past year, and you’ve accomplished all that, and you’ve been really intentional about that. And I think almost working together has kind of forced us into that. And I think that’s great. And yeah, I think that it’s hard to — so a lot of — it’s hard to quantify that, though. Like how do you quantify? Because at the end of the day, pharmacists are scientists. They’re very analytical, so they want to say, OK, if I’m paying this amount of fee, am I going to get this return? And I put that back on how do you value x or how do you value y? But I understand, like you have to get value from that. But yeah, it’s great feedback. And I think the things that really fire me up are those types of, that type of feedback but also seeing a client — and I have a few clients in mind that come to me with $40,000 in credit card debt, and they pay it off like aggressively, very quickly, so we can move onto the next thing. And we can see the movement in their overall net worth, so where before they were -$200,000, maybe they’re now they’re only -$140,000, which sounds like people laugh at that, but those are real dollars that we’re making moves towards. So I love those cases, and it inspires me to kind of keep going and really be the advisor, be the planner there that is there to back them up and really encourage them and really give them tough love when they need it as well.

Tim Ulbrich: Alright, so Tim, we’ve talked before on this podcast many times about the value of fee-only financial planning. Episodes 015-017, which I referenced earlier, and lots of variability that’s out there in the financial planning industry. So just real brief, fee-only, what is it? And why does it matter?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I guess in my profession — and I guess I struggle to call it a profession for a lot of reasons, but really, the way that advisors are really identified, so if we have any John Oliver fans out there who does Last Week Tonight, he does a segment on financial advisors and kind of what they are and how they work, and I always reference that because I think it’s actually pretty funny and pretty accurate. You know, essentially, a financial advisor or financial planner, that name really doesn’t mean anything. Unlike a PharmD, an MD, a JD that actually carries weight to it, the CFP has, that’s kind of like an accreditation that you want, a Certified Financial Planner, but essentially, financial advisors, financial planners, are typically categorized in three buckets. You have a commission agent, which in the very extreme example, think of like Wolf of Wall Street. “Hey, Tim, I’m walking in the parking lot, I had this great idea on a stock that I want to sell you or this life insurance plan or this disability policy.” It’s very transactional, and it’s the sale of product. So I’m trying to get my commission and then go. The fee-based world, which this is where I started in the industry before I launched Script Financial was fee-based. Fee-based is basically where you have advice and the sale of product, basically they’re merged together. And anytime that happens, you have a conflict of interest. So in my last firm, I would say, “Hey, client, I could sell you this mutual fund that pays me a 1% commission and a 1% trail or this one that pays me a 5% commission. Or if we talked about term and whole-life, this particular term policy pays me a commission of x and whole-life pays me a lot more,” so anytime that you have — and we see this, Tim, we see this with physicians. So physicians are not supposed to get kickbacks on the medication they’re prescribing because, you know, there’s a conflict there. So it’s the same in our industry, except right now, most of the advisors out there operate in that fee-based world. What fee-only does, and it’s a very, very small subset of financial advisors out there. I’ve heard estimates it’s less than 5%. What fee-only is is basically you separate the advice, the dispensing of advice, from the product. So my compensation comes directly from the client, there’s no kickback or referrals. It’s not through a mutual fund or insurance company. It comes directly from the clients. So I don’t really — I’m not influenced to put a client in Product X or Y. I want to basically — I’m giving them the advice, they’re paying me for the advice, and I’ll put them in products that I think are in their best interest. So the big thing with fee-only is that it follows that fiduciary standard of care, which means that I’m legally bound to act in my client’s best interest versus a suitability care, which the majority of advisors out there where they can actually put their own interests ahead of their clients’. Which is crazy to me that that is actually a thing.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think just to drive that home one step further, if we think about the traditional financial advising model, typically, there’s a compensation based on Assets Under Management, so how much you’ve invested with them or commission from product scales, which often are hidden from view or hourly fees. So in other words, that advisor is incentivized to focus on investing over other options. And sometimes, this means that your goals as the client and their goals as the advisor are not fully aligned. And that is so important for pharmacists to hear that message because as we launch YFP Planning, we talk about fee-only financial planning services, which is what you’ve been doing with Script Financial, that it really bucks that model entirely. And that’s really important for those of you that are looking comprehensively, that I need help with student loans, I need help with credit card debt, I need help with my budget, I need help with home buying, I need help with estate planning and all these other things with investments being one piece of that. But we’re not going to only focus on investments, ignoring the rest of the financial plan. And so I think that holistic model and that pricing incentivizes that comprehensive nature is incredibly important for our clients to be considering, whether it’s us or somebody else, to make sure that they’re looking at a model that’s fee-only, that there’s a right educational credential and that pricing is done so in a way that really incentivizes that advisor to work with you on a comprehensive nature.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and one of the things that frustrates me a bit is, you know, when I’m talking to a prospective client and they’re like, “Well, maybe I’ll go with my parents’ advisor that doesn’t charge them anything,” which is utterly false. It’s so, like, nothing comes free. So you know, typically, what happens there is that they don’t know what they’re being charged, which is a problem. Transparency is a problem in our industry. So that’s a problem. But I think also is the — I think when you work with a professional, there’s almost like a sense that they know what they’re talking about. And I would say by and large, most advisors have no idea what to do with student loans or how to help clients with a budget because it’s just not something, you know, most advisors want minimums of $250,000 in investable assets, so there’s almost this assumption of wealth. So it’s like, “Hey, kid straight out of pharmacy school, good on you. But you don’t need financial planning help,” which is utterly false. It’s just that their model is set in a way that they’re incentivized to go after those that have investable assets. And then really with the student loan piece in particular, I’ve had clients that say, “Hey, I’ve been working with this other advisor, and their advice on the student loans was like, oh, they’ll just take care of themselves. They’ll just amortize over time,” which is like ugh, I just want to scream to the heavens and say, “No, that is terrible advice.” But then they’re also in a whole-life policy or whatever. So it’s just crazy talk.

Tim Ulbrich: Follow the dollar. Follow the dollar.

Tim Baker: Yeah, exactly.

Tim Ulbrich: So talk us through the process at YFP Planning. Where do people begin? And then once they go through that process of trying to figure out is it a good fit for them or not? What does that look like from there?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so it’s a great question, Tim. So I think the best, you know, if you’re listening to this podcast and you’re like, man, I think this works for me, probably the best thing would be to go YFPPlanning.com, and you can actually schedule like a free discovery meeting with myself. And really, this allows me to kind of learn a little bit about you and potentially your spouse, what are the big issues that we’re dealing with and kind of talk through the process and what we do and kind of get a sense of each other to see if we would be a good fit. So you know, if we decide that, we kind of go through a step to kind of get you onboarded. So it could be really the first meeting that we have is get organized. So in the get organized meeting, we essentially look at your client portal. So once you become a client, you get a welcome email that says, “Hey, start linking all of your things to the client portal: your checking, your savings, your student loans, all that.” And what I’m doing is I’m building the first lens in which I’m going to look through to give you advice. So I’m looking at a snapshot of your income and your net worth, and then we also do kind of a 90-day retroactive budget exercise just to see how money is flowing through the household. So that’s really the first meeting. And then from there, we essentially schedule the second meeting, which is the second lens in which I’m looking through is it’s all about the goals and kind of hearkens back to the three questions that we went through with you and Jess. And really, it’s where I learn the most about my clients and really how the client views what a wealthy life is. So we’re going to ask you thought-provoking questions that you probably have not asked yourself. But the idea is to really, based on those two meetings, build a plan in a way that I am helping you grow and protect income and grow and protect your net worth while keeping your goals in mind. To me, that’s the name of the game.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, I’m guessing some are thinking, can I just do all of this myself? So what is your answer to that? Because I know for you, fit is very important in terms of the right fit for you, the right fit for the client. So what is your response to that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think, you know, I think the answer is that you can. You absolutely can. And there are a lot of people that kind of more of a DIY approach. And Tim, I would probably put you as a more DIY, especially before we first met, but I think once you start working with someone and you can kind of see the power of kind of the ongoing coaching and accountability, it almost kicks that into second gear. So I think you can. I think my view on that is, you know, I’m a financial planner, and I need a financial planner because, again, I need someone to objectively look at Shea and I’s situation and say, hey, we come from very different places in terms of money. These are our goals, how do we get there? So I get it. Pharmacists are very smart. They’re very analytical. But you know, even if you’re going to play a sport, you’re going to workout, typically, you have a trainer or you have a coach that kind of looks at your situation and looks at it from that third-party viewpoint and say, “Hey, brass tax, these are things that I think you’re doing well at. These are things that I think we need to improve upon.” So I think that you can. I would argue that what we do across the board with tax — so the slide that I put up last night was the average pharmacist will make $9 million, and $6 million will flow through your accounts. What’s at stake is really the $3 million that typically is eaten up by tax. How do we be as efficient with that as possible? You know, I’m analyzing an individual’s 401k now, and their expense ratios are like 2.67%, which is crazy. Like it’s crazy. So with a little bit of adjustment, we can really lower that substantially. And over the course of their lifetime, we’ll save probably hundreds of thousands of dollars, not an exaggeration.

Tim Ulbrich: Maybe more.

Tim Baker: Maybe more. And again, that’s not a guarantee or anything, so nothing like that. But like, it’s those types of things that either you — the audience, you guys are trained as pharmacists, you’re not really trained to look at some of these things that I do every day with clients. So it’s just that other, maybe more technical piece of it to really look at. And again, I think kind of the high-touch that we are with offering the tax and the cash flow and budgeting piece is I think a really differentiator between us and maybe the other guy.

Tim Ulbrich: So to our listeners, regardless of whether you choose to explore YFP Planning, I want to offer up a challenge to you that is two questions. No. 1, what are you going to do in the next 30 days to change your financial situation? And No. 2, what’s the first step that you’re going to take towards your wealthy life? Because everyone we’ve talked to, myself included, constantly says, “I wish I would have started earlier,” right? And when I go talk with students and residents and I talk with faculty and pharmacists and preceptors, the one thing they say is, “I wish I would have started earlier,” or “I wish I would have learned this information sooner.” So Tim, let’s wrap up here. Just give us a little bit of background on the YFP Planning team — I know it’s a team that’s growing — and what our listeners can expect as they engage with us as a group.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I’m super fortunate enough to have a good team that surrounds me. Like I mentioned, Paul who was on our webinar last night, he is essentially my go-to. He’s basically Director of Operations and Tax. So he handles all of the tax returns internally. Frankie, who’s my assistant, she does all the behind-the-scenes work that sets me up for meetings and follow-up and all the things that are crucial to kind of push the financial plan forward and helps me with that. And Tom, who’s my assistant advisor. And all Tom does is work on cash flow and budget. He’s a super nerd, he likes that stuff.

Tim Ulbrich: Super nerd.

Tim Baker: Super nerd, yeah. So I’m so happy to have them as part of my team. And of course, you guys in terms of helping the firm grow and Caitlyn, who does an excellent job with the podcast, all integral parts of the team. But I think like as we — and Tim, I was thinking about this, like you know, the other day, I’m like maybe we should have like a career section on our website. Because I think that we are growing, and I would love to be able to have maybe jobs out there that maybe would be interesting to the YFP community. But I’m excited. We’re looking at bringing on a paraplanner in the coming weeks and just to add additional backup. And I think as we grow, one of the things that we’re really — and we talk about this a lot, kind of the three Tims — is making sure that our brand is — we want to make sure that what we represent and what we believe in is kind of is shown amongst all of our team members. So I’m just excited about, you know, really the rebrand and I think where we’re going to take this going into 2019 and beyond.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And to the point you made about the careers piece, we’ve got some exciting announcements coming out, looking for some writers that are passionate about this topic.

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: We welcome and value other perspectives. And then also, we’ve been floating around the idea of a student internship. So if there’s any students out there listening that are nerds on this topic, we’d love to hear from you. [email protected]. And we’re hoping to make that a reality here in 2019. So to the YFP community, as always, we appreciate you joining us each and every week. And we’re excited to be on this journey alongside of you. And if you’re not yet a part of the community over at the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, check it out. That group every day inspires me as they’re challenging, helping one another, motivating one another, sharing success stories, looking for encouragement. So again, that’s the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group. Tim, it’s been a lot of fun, as always, with this episode and the journey, and looking forward to an awesome 2019.

Tim Baker: Same here.

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 087: Student Loan Updates with Travis Hornsby


Student Loan Updates with Travis Hornsby

On this episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, Tim Ulbrich interviews Travis Hornsby, Founder of Student Loan Planner and Chief Student Loan Planner. Travis shares student loan updates and talks about his journey starting the Student Loan Planner, the most common mistakes he sees pharmacists making with their student loans, the pros and cons of student loan refinancing, what legislative changes he anticipates will happen and the one step you can take today if you are feeling overwhelmed with where to go next with your student loans.

About Today’s Guest

Travis started Student Loan Planner in October 2016 after helping his wife and her friends figure out their six figure student loans. He used to be a bond trader, so he took his Excel heavy skill set and built models for how to save money paying back student debt. When he and his wife tackled her debt from med school, there were not a lot of resources out there for professionals like her. Most of the sites that did exist just wanted us to refinance so they could earn a commission.

Summary

Travis Hornsby, founder of Student Loan Planner, talks all things student loans with Tim Ulbrich. The Student Loan Planner has saved 1,500 clients a projected $80 million over the lifetime of their loans.

Before launching the Student Loan Planner, Travis worked as a bond trader for one of the world’s largest companies. However, he wasn’t excited about getting up for work in the morning. He sought early retirement, traveled the world, and met his now wife who had a lot of medical school debt. Travis used his experience with Excel to model paying off her student loans and did the same process later for a lot of their friends. This experience paired with his realization of how little or bad advice is given for paying off student loans led him to create his Student Loan Planner business.

Travis provides insight and updates for different loan repayment options and reminds those with pharmacy school student loan debt that they have a lot of options.

First, Travis discusses the Public Service Loan Forgiveness program (PSLF). He shares that a lot of people are getting the story wrong about the history and working of PSLF and thinks that in the future, borrowers taking this path will be grandfathered in to complete the program, even if the program has changed or doesn’t exist anymore.

Travis also discusses the return of investment of the pharmacy degree and that it’s important to take your focus off of debt and think about your broad financial goals, as this can aid in determining which repayment plan to chose. He also speaks about the refinancing market and how to know if that’s the option that will work best for your situation depending on your debt-to-income ratio. Travis talks about the benefits of the “refinancing ladder” and that you are able to refinance your loans multiple times.

He also gives advice to those that may be feeling overwhelmed by their debt. Travis shares that it’s important to determine what your goal is, whether it’s to get your student loan balance to zero or for your loans to be forgiven. This will help you determine which path to take and allow you to plan out how to repay your loans.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Travis, welcome to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast!

Travis Hornby: Great to be here, thanks for having me, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I’m excited to have you on and talk all things student loans and excited to be able to pick your brain as somebody I view to be a leading expert in this space and hear more about the work you’ve done at Student Loan Planner and also talk about this topic, this behemoth that is student loans, the impact on pharmacy graduates, what you’re seeing with your clients and the future of student loans. Specifically, we’ll talk a little bit about loan forgiveness, refinancing and other things that I know our listeners are in tune with or want to learn more about. And Travis, I have to say, I was reflecting as I was going back, preparing for this episode. I think it was just over two years ago I heard about your journey, we had a phone call, got a chance to talk a little bit about the vision of what we each were working on. And it’s been incredible to watch what you have been doing over at Student Loan Planner, so congratulations on the work that you’ve done.

Travis Hornby: Thanks, and you know, great work as well, educating pharmacists and making them more financially literate. It’s badly, badly needed. So really grateful for Your Financial Pharmacist being out there. We’ve got very similar positive missions to try to help people as a community, so it’s exciting to talk.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And before I ask you to talk a little bit more about your journey of starting Student Loan Planner, I want to make our audience familiar with the work that you’re doing if they’re already not, so StudentLoanPlanner.com, and you have saved over 1,500 clients a projected $80 million over the lifetime of their loans. And we’ll talk a little bit about how you have done that. And the website, again, StudentLoanPlanner.com, is an incredible resource: up-to-date information, you’ve got the blog, you’ve now got the podcast we’ll talk about here in a little bit, calculators, quizzes. Your calculators are phenomenal. Is that you building those? I mean, that’s amazing if you’ve been building those calculators.

Travis Hornby: Yeah, you know, I did build it. That’s my background, I was a bond trader for one of the world’s largest investment companies, and you know, the career path is keep your head down, make a lot of good trades, you’ll work your way up to being a portfolio manager, and that’s a wonderful career path. It’s a very numerative career path, but it just wasn’t for me. It wasn’t what got me up in the morning, really passionate and excited to go to work. And I’m a big believer that no matter whether that’s in your field that you initially chose or whatever it is, you should try to seek it out. And so for me, that kind of led me to trying to do early retirement. So I actually quit my job at 25 and traveled the world for a little bit and then ended up dating this woman who had a lot of student loan debt, my now wife. And she had a lot of debt from medical school, and so I was thinking, well, you know, I’ve got all these Excel skills fresh out of being a bond trader. I should use these to model it for her. And I did. And then she told me to tell all her friends about it because they were in the same boat. And then we had friends when we were up in Philadelphia that were in a bunch of different graduate programs, and I found that the math was applicable to their situations as well. And then I thought, wow, this is a lot more fun than making rich people richer. Not that that’s a terrible thing because a lot of big investors are mom-and-pop type people, and that’s a noble goal, but it just wasn’t something that made me super excited to help people that already had figured out their financial issues.

Tim Ulbrich: So Travis, what were you seeing at the time in terms of — you mentioned your situation with your wife and the journey that you guys had paying that off, and you’ve kind of brought your experiences together as a bond trader. You had this desire of kind of doing something you are passionate about. What did you see in your own journey as it related to paying off student loan debt and achieving that vision of becoming debt-free? And why were you then passionate about spreading that onto others?

Travis Hornby: Sure. So a lot of your pharmacists that are listening to this that work at not-for-profit or government employers will really feel the pain here, will really feel our pain. So my wife worked at a not-for-profit employer when she was in residency and in fellowship. So she had a bunch of credit towards loan forgiveness. And then at about year 7 or 8, you know, in terms of the numbers of years toward the 10 that she needed to get public service loan forgiveness, she submitted all the paperwork after I made her realize that hey, this is a thing, you should really apply for this, you should be eligible for this and then we should be able to just cap your payments out on the IBR plan for the last two or three years of it when you’re attending, and we should be able to get $100,000 wiped away. And so I submitted all the forms, and then Fed Loan came back to us and said, “You don’t have any credit on half of your loans. And on the other half of your loans, you only have three years of credit.”

Tim Ulbrich: Classic, right?

Travis Hornby: Yeah. I was just blown away by this. I said, how is this possible that you’ve made all these payments based on your income for seven years and you have almost no credit for a lot of your loans and barely any on the other half? So I thought that was just absurd, and so I ran the numbers again to see, well, pretend that she gets the full three years of credit on everything, what does that mean for the rest of the PSLF path? Should we count on this or not? And her debt was small enough, you know, thankfully, that we just decided that the projected savings, there might be like $20,000 or $30,000 left over at the end of the 10 years, so we’re just going to refinance it and pay it off really quickly. So that’s what we did. So we paid off her $124,000 of med school debt, which is, you know, very low compared to a lot of people that I talk to. And we’re very blessed that it wasn’t very high, but at the same time, it’s really crazy because it should be the injustice of this whole system going through this personally because her parents were first-generation Americans coming over here from Hong Kong and then Canada. And they really sacrificed and put tons of their savings into her med school to try to help her come out with less debt. And if she’d only had better guidance, she not only could have had her parents keep a lot of that money, but she could have paid even less of it back if she had had that information early on in the process. So I thought that was just so outrageous that one, the cost was already so high for medical school. But second, that she got such bad advice from that same medical school that caused her to be kind of taken advantage of by the loan services, just the fact that cost us five, even six, figures. I just thought that was terrible, and I didn’t want that to happen to anybody else.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that you took your personal pain and obviously, you know, nobody wants to go through that, but taking that personal pain and turning it into good and teaching others. And I think as I follow your blog, I weekly kind of follow, I think you’re an incredible teacher of taking what is a unbelievably complicated subject — probably one we both agree is unnecessarily complicated — and really breaking it down in a way that people can understand and really take a step back to say, what is the best student loan repayment option for my personal situation? And I know coming out of school, similar type of a journey, as I look back, I could have went Public Service Loan Forgiveness, I could have refinanced, didn’t know what either of those were, didn’t have the education, didn’t have the tools. I couldn’t tell you what was subsidized, unsubsidized. I couldn’t tell you IBR and PAYE and REPAYE. I didn’t have any idea any of that knowledge. And I think that’s a consistent theme we see with lots of pharmacists, I’m sure you see with your clients, and being able to break that down and as you work with people one-on-one to say, hey, based on your situation, this is really what we think is the best path forward I think is incredible. So that’s been fun to watch your journey and see that grow along the way. So let’s talk while we’re in the moment of loan forgiveness, let’s talk about that for a minute because I think there’s so much swirling right now about Public Service Loan Forgiveness. We’ve talked about it on this podcast on multiple occasions. In Episode 018, we talked about maximizing the benefits of PSLF. Episode 078, we just recently talked about whether or not pursuing loan forgiveness is a waste. And so much news swirling around about, you know, at 99.x% of applicants being rejected and you know, is this something as a new pharmacist graduate that might actually be viable for me or not? So give us the lowdown on what’s going on with loan forgiveness. Is there any new news out there? What should recent graduates be considering as they potentially pursue this path?

Travis Hornby: Yeah, that’s a great question. So the listeners that are planning on loan forgiveness or afraid that they might not get it, they first need to realize historically what happened with this proram. So this program was around since 2007 on the books but functionally, it really didn’t exist until like 2009. And in earnest, it didn’t exist until 2010. And the reason is because you had FFEL loans before 2010 that were basically loans issued under an old loan program. So before 2010, when the government took over all student loan lending and created everyone had to use the direct loan program past that point. Prior to that point, you had this FFEL loans, which are basically bank loans that are backed by the government. And those loans, because you can think of the banks being the ones that actually hold the debt, obviously they wouldn’t want those loans forgiven, right? And so the government essentially gave them basically allowed the banks to not have to deal with the PSLF thing for those loans. And so when 2010 rolled around, then everybody started getting direct loans by default without having to do anything special. And everybody had access to things called Income-Based Repayment that people could sign up for without having to be a PhD-level expert in Department of Education bureaucracy. So a lot of people look at these statistics, and they get really depressed. But the problem with that is that you have to look at what happened 10 years ago to understand why so few people are getting approved today. And that’s a very hard thing to do and explain in a quick 800-word article on CNBC or something like that. So that’s the problem is a lot of people are getting the story wrong because yeah, like it was almost impossible to have loans that qualified in 2008 and 2009. That’s why you’re only seeing people that basically went to like one-year Master’s degrees that documented everything perfectly, they got super, super lucky being the ones that are getting approved right now. And so for that reason, I don’t personally believe that we’re going to see any large-scale forgiveness for PharmDs until about 2023. I think that’s when we’re going to see the first cohort that had been on an income-driven program for, you know, 10 years consistently and actually has a full slate of PharmD debt that they’re going to get forgiven. So a lot of the people out there that are pharmacists, you know, don’t expect any shocking news until then.

Tim Ulbrich: And you actually recently talked with — or I can’t remember, you might have blogged about it — a real, live person who actually had loan forgiveness, right? I mean, they do actually exist.

Travis Hornby: They do. Yeah, it was great. She sent me an email — that’s one of the best parts of having a student loan blog and just being super focused on that alone is, you know, I got this long email from this person who was like, this is my story. Feel free to use it. And I was like, absolutely. I’ll take you up on that. So I wrote a blog post about it, and she only had $19,000 from a very short, abbreviated degree program in like 2008 that just happened to be from one of the right schools. Because they had direct loans prior to 2010, but it was very limited. And so this person just happened to have the right kind of debt, she had signed up for the wrong kind of program, but she followed the TEPSLF rules, the Temporary Expanded PSLF rules, precisely. And she ended up getting loan forgiveness, and it was amazing. She even got refunds for all of the payments that she made that she shouldn’t actually have to make based off of her payment count. So that’s really amazing. Like anybody that’s worried about not getting PSLF needs to probably read that article because it shows you that not only are they going to cover it and give it to you, they’re also going to give a literal refund for all of that money that you pay that you shouldn’t have had to pay. So that’s the most amazing program that you can really think of in terms of if you can actually get it.

Tim Ulbrich: So one of the questions I probably get most often, Travis, is what is the future of this? And what certainty, if any, what’s the political climate? And obviously, none of us have a crystal ball, but as you’re in this each and every day in the weeds, I mean, do you foresee major legislative changes coming in the future? And if so, should there be any security that people feel in terms of being grandfathered in in terms of when those rules may be changed?

Travis Hornby: Yeah, so the thing that people need to realize is the way that the U.S. government works is the grandfather people in, and they make changes on a long-term basis. So a perfect example for this is social security. Social security, whenever they need to fix the program, they don’t cut benefits for people that are currently retired because they don’t want to make people super angry at them in the short term. So politicians is the “them” that I’m talking about. So what they do is instead, they just gradually raise the retirement age over time. So if you talk to people that are looking at social security, their retirement age goes up by like I think it’s 2 months every year or so for the next x amount of years until it hits 67. So something similar like that’s going to happen, I think, with PSLF. I think that it’s very, very expensive, this program. People have no idea how expensive it’s going to be from the taxpayers’ perspective. So I do expect it to get phased out eventually. I think that you’re going to a future Congress realize that it’s way, way more expensive than they thought probably in the early 2020s, and then I think that they’re going to probably curtail it or eliminate it, but they’re going to eliminate it for future borrowers, and they’re going to eliminate it for people who start graduate school after a certain point. So it’s going to be real interesting to see what grad programs do. I would imagine they’ll probably try to enroll a lot of people early. You know, so they can get access to this. But yeah, I do think it’s going to end at some point in the next, say, 5-10 years. But I think it’s going to end for people who have never taken out yet. So I think that the PSLF promises that are being made now will be continued to be paid out well into the early 2030s.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. I’m going to switch gears for a minute here and talk about the ROI of the pharmacy degree. You’ve blogged on this topic, and we’ve talked about it here. We’re in a landscape that is shifting. We’re hopeful, I think, as those that love the profession we’re going to see this shift back, but obviously supply-and-demand, and actually just yesterday, I got an email from somebody in the YFP community talking about they’re a fourth-year graduate, getting ready to go out into the market, they’re worried about the market being saturated, salaries are decreasing, and they’re basically looking at between salary reductions and a reduction in the number of hours, planning on a base salary somewhere around $85,000. And the question being, what can I, what should I be doing to plan financially for that? And I think historically, the message that I felt and many others have felt that don’t worry about the student loans, you’re going to have a great income. Well, that story is changing. So as you’re working with clients, Travis, specifically your pharmacy clients, are you seeing this trend? Are you seeing the shift? And what are some of the things that you’re trying to help them think about in terms of intentionality of student loan repayment? Maybe being strategic about finding an employer that qualifies for loan forgiveness, refinancing, how does this shifting ROI of the degree in the job market impact their plan to pay back student loans?

Travis Hornby: Sure. So the average pharmacist client that we’ve had has had about $214,000 of student loan debt. So that’s obviously a multiple of what the first-year starting salary is. If you were going to talk about the average income being $85,000, then in terms of the average that we’ve seen, that would a debt-to-income ratio of about 2.5, 2.5 times income. So generally, what we tell people is if you have a debt-to-income ratio that’s above 1.5-to-1, and this is at a family level, then that means that you probably need to go for loan forgiveness, you know, in some fashion. Basically, what you need to realize is that if you try to refinance this thing, it’s kind of like walking in front of a train. If you’re making $85,000 a year, you have $200,000 in debt, you’ll have to pay $2,000 a month for 10 years. So that’s about a third of your take-home pay going to debt. That’s really not that sustainable.

Tim Ulbrich: For 10 years.

Travis Hornby: For 10 years. That’s really not a sustainable or a smart decision. And that’s not anything, that’s not a mean statement, that’s just reality of math. And you could pay the debt back, but if you do, then you’re not going to be accomplishing things like saving for retirement, saving for your kids’ college, you know, buying a house, like doing all these other financial goals that are really important. So one thing that I like to tell somebody is take your focus off of the debt from a really zoned-in level and start thinking more about, you know, what are your broad financial goals? And how does that fit into your debt repayment? So for example, if somebody has $120,000 in pharmacy school debt and they are one of those lucky folks who does get a full-time job at a CVS in maybe a rural location making $120,000-130,000 a year, yeah, sure. Refinancing can make a lot of sense. And paying it back in five years and doing a refi ladder where you start with a 10-year, refi to a 5-year later, you know, and getting rid of it as fast as you can, that’s a great decision. But when you’ve got an $85k type of income, I’m assuming that this person’s not working at a community hospital or an eligible not-for-profit. So that’s one of the biggest misconceptions that I’ve run into with pharmacists is they’re not aware of the other loan forgiveness. So the IDR loan forgiveness. And that’s going to be more and more important for pharmacists. You know, one thing that I think is fascinating is $85,000 is still an amazing salary. That’s still really good compared to your typical person that’s going to go work for a corporation and make $50,000-60,000 a year. And if you’re working 32 hours a week for that income, that’s exceptional. And the reality is I think we’re going to continue to see, you know, this decline in salaries because of the acceptance rate of pharmacy schools is so high overall. And so I think for a person who’s in pharmacy school now, you think about this from a positive perspective is the worst case scenario, your debt is a tax. It’s a percentage of your income. And so if you lose 10% of your income to student loans, and that’s your cost — I know you have to put a couple hundred dollars away for a tax bomb one day — then that $85,000 income can actually be pretty attractive. And to take it a step further, you know, how many people out there can go earn a $50,000-60,000 a year job or salary, rather, working 20-25 hours a week? Not a lot of people.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I think that’s great insight. And we’ve talked before on the show, and I want to emphasize it again because I don’t think we talk enough about what we call non-PSLF forgiveness, or the other PSLF forgiveness. And I think you’re spot-on with this debt-to-income ratio, if that continues to trend in the direction we’re seeing it trend, that option is going to become all the more important as when you evaluate. And I also would add to that, Travis, and we’ll talk here fo a minute about refi, but as interest rates are climbing, obviously, that changes the math a little bit on the refi. And I like the example that you used of pharmacists coming out, maybe they have a lower debt load than the average, so maybe $110,000-120,000. Maybe they’re making $120,000-130,000, they’ve got one of those full-time jobs that’s paying a decent salary, well then obviously, paying them off or refinancing looks very different than somebody maybe who has $250,000 of debt and they’ve got an $85,000 income. And to Tim Baker’s credit, one of the things he talks a lot about, and I appreciate his external view into the pharmacy world is that we typically don’t think about career advice in the sense of seeking something like a qualifying employer for loan forgiveness, right? We often are thinking about it specifically on the type of pharmacy practice that you’re interested in, salaries have been relatively equal since I graduated in 2008. You aren’t seeing huge discrepancies from one area to another. But we are starting to see that trend happen. And I think now, a very important consideration is if you’re somebody that has an extremely debt-to-income ratio, then really that choice of employer and potentially being able to pursue Public Service Loan Forgiveness is going to be a viable option. So Travis, as a follow-up to that, what are the trends you’re seeing in the refi market? It feels to me that six or 12 months ago, even maybe a year or two years ago, the math on that was very lucrative because of where interest rates are. And I feel like that’s tapered off a little bit as interest rates have come up. What have you seen in terms of the clients that you’re working with?

Travis Hornby: Yeah, I mean, a few months ago, that was definitely the case. It’s gotten a little bit better because the 10-year Treasury yield has declined a little bit again with a little bit of uncertainty in the economy and the government shutdown, China’s economy being a little bit slower growth than expected, so I think that the refi opportunity will exist for at least probably the next few years. I’m not sure if it’s going to go completely away. I don’t think it will because, you know, a reminder for folks that when you borrow in school, it is tied to what the government’s borrowing cost is. So you know, eventually, if interest rates keep rising, you will also feel it in your student loans that you’re taking out while you’re in school. You know? So last year, Grad Plus was 7%. This year, it’s 7.6%.

Tim Ulbrich: Ugh.

Travis Hornby: Yeah, so even though you might not be able to refi to like a 4% or 4.5%, you know, if you can still refi to like 5-5.5%, and you’re having to borrow at 7.5% or 8% or 8.5%, like that’s still savings, you know? But yeah, the refi market, I think the one thing that I’d like people to know more of — and we have a similar philosophy too on how we hook people up with the refi deals because you guys obviously have a lot of great bonuses on your site — and the thing to do is to refinance multiple times. So I did a survey of our readers, had almost 1,000 responses, and only half of them knew that you could even refinance more than one time.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, we see that a lot too.

Travis Hornby: Yeah. So for example, like you can refinance for — say you’re one of those people making $130k and you have $120k in student loan debt, well, you don’t want to do a five-year because that payment’s going to be over $2,000 a month, and what if you lose your job? What if you want to move? What if you want to work part-time or something like that happens? So that’s a very common feeling. And so rather than jump right into a five-year, what you can do is you can do a 10- or a 15-year where the payment’s around $1,000-1,300 a month, something like that, and you can pay extra. So you can pay maybe $2,000-3,000 a month to really knock the debt down. And then once you knock the debt down a bunch, then you can refinance it again and maybe cut your 4.5% or 5% rate down to maybe a 3.5% or 4% rate with about the same monthly payment by refinancing to a shorter term. So that’s called a refi ladder, and a lot of people don’t understand that. And that’s something that could save people money. I will say this, though, the refi thing, I don’t want people to get super focused on the refi thing because that will save you several thousand dollars, it really can in terms of interest costs. And if you pay down your debt faster than you would otherwise, it could save you tens of thousands. But loan forgiveness can save you hundreds of thousands in certain situations. So that’s why, you know, you’ve got to be real careful also about not making extra payments. One problem that I see people make or one mistake that I see people make — I’ll give you an example. I had a buddy who was a community pharmacist at a hospital system, and he was paying on the standard 10-year plan. So he was paying on $200k of debt about $2,000 a month, you know, instead, he could have been on the Revised Pay As You Earn plan, and he could have been paying about like $690 a month. So you know, saving almost a little over $1,300 a month, and he was eligible for Public Service Loan Forgiveness.

Tim Ulbrich: And maxing out a retirement account and all of that jazz, right?

Travis Hornby: Yeah. And then he could reduce his student loan payment even more. So and that’s the PSLF example. You know, the flip side to that is a pharmacist who wants to have a family, work 20 hours a week, wants to have more time for hobbies or whatever that reason would be. And then that person can pay, you know, say $400 a month working part-time. And then you just have to make sure you’re prepared for that tax bomb when it hits in 20-25 years.

Tim Ulbrich: So I hope the students that are listening, hopefully one of the take-home messages you’re getting as you’re hearing Travis drop lots of wisdom here is knowledge around this topic is obviously going to be able to influence a decision that could save tens if not hundreds of thousands of dollars. So using this time, you know, before you graduate, before you go through the grace period, to really identify for your personal situation, taking a step back, looking at all of your financial goals, looking at the type of job you’re going to pursue, residency, no residency, all these variable, debt-to-income ratio, and coming up with the best student loan repayment option is huge. Refi ladder, Travis, I like that. I know the concept, we talk about it. We talk about that idea, but I think you should brand that. So I haven’t heard that term used before.

Travis Hornby: Yeah, I should trademark it, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Travis Hornby: I got a lot of zingers here, you know? I mean, yeah. There’s all kinds of weird things that I’ve learned doing this that you wouldn’t think about unless you’ve really had a lot of cases. So I’ve done over 1,000 plans personally. I think that’s more than anybody else in the country. I’m not positive, but I think that is. And you know, advised more than 330 million myself.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s incredible.

Travis Hornby: Yeah, so that’s pretty bad because that tells you how much debt it out there, you know?

Tim Ulbrich: Well, you’ve got $1.what? $1.4 trillion more to go? Something like that?

Travis Hornby: Yeah, exactly. So I mean, so one example is something called the breadwinner loophole, that’s another one of my weird terms I’ve come up with. So for example, a pharmacist in California might be making $90,000 a year, maybe she has a stay-at-home spouse, and that spouse makes nothing. And she’s eligible for Pay As You Earn. Well, in community property states, you can file separately for taxes and equally distribute income. So you can equally distribute income based on community property rules in these certain states. There’s like nine of them. And then you can basically have instead of an income of say $90,000, her income would be $45,000. And because you equalize the incomes, you also eliminated most of the tax penalty from filing separately as a married couple. So that’s an example of just some random thing that, you know, we realized probably a year into doing this that people could do since the payments are based on your adjusted gross income. And you know, we’ve not received any guidance on this yet, but it certainly seems like this is a legitimate way to approach repayment in these nine specific community property states. So that’s another one of these random things that you wouldn’t really think about unless you do this all day, every day. So that’s one thing that I like about our focus is we really do focus just on people that have $50,000-$1 million of student loan debt. Really, our primary client is in the $200-500k range. But you know, it lends itself for having a deep specialty level of expertise on something that’s very complicated. You don’t have to worry about getting the broad financial plan together, the insurance or things like that. That’s somebody else’s job.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, that’s your job. Yeah.

Travis Hornby: Exactly, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: What are, Travis, some of the most common mistakes that you’re seeing pharmacy graduates make as it comes to their student loans? I mean, I’m sure there’s a ton of them. After you do enough of these, you start to see some I’m guessing repetitive things that are happening over and over again that our listeners can be aware of.

Travis Hornby: Well, for your pre-pharmacy listeners, there’s a whole bunch of schools that have opened up to basically take your money. And that’s why they exist. I mean, that’s just my personal opinion. But you know, you have like high-quality schools, you know? Like UNC or like Ohio State, that’s where you’re at, right, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: Go Bucks. Yes.

Travis Hornby: Yeah, so maybe University of Florida. I mean there’s pharmacy schools that have been around for a long time that are high quality that even if you have a crash in the profession are not going to be going anywhere. But there’s a whole bunch of new schools that I won’t mention any by name because you know, I don’t love getting served lawsuits, but you know, basically there’s schools that were initiated that are private schools that were founded in the past, you know, 5-10 years I would say are automatically suspect. It doesn’t necessarily mean it’s a bad school, but you want to be very careful. And from a student’s perspective, if you’re going to go to these places, you just have to realize that things could potentially not end well if you go to one of these programs that has a high acceptance rate. So I would actually ask the school to give you their acceptance rate data. I would ask them to tell you what their average salaries are for graduates in writing. And I would actually do some due diligence and actually ask them in a very assertive manner for these statistics that you deserve to have prior to making this decision. Now, if you already have the debt, then I think that your perspective has to be a positive one. There are, like I said — you don’t even have to actually be a pharmacist, which is kind of crazy. These income-driven repayment plans apply whether or not you’re unemployed or making a bazillion dollars as a CEO. So it doesn’t matter that you become a pharmacist, even if you graduate pharmacy school. So from a mental health perspective, don’t feel trapped, even if you have $200,000, $300,000, $400,000 of pharmacy school debt. Do not feel trapped. You have so many more options than you think you do. And if you want to go make 50% more than the median household income in America, you can do that, even in a big city and live a pretty decent life. You’ll have to live on a budget, you’ll have to be a little careful with your expenses. It’s not as good as it used to be, but you’ll certainly make a good living. And so I would just say in terms of student loan mistakes, I mean, it’s a little broad, but I guess I just want people to know that the biggest mistakes you can have is not having a plan and sticking your head in the sand.

Tim Ulbrich: Amen. And if I could echo that, that’s the one thing we’ve seen, Travis, is the wandering through graduation into new practitioner life of not having an intentional plan. We’ve already highlighted and we don’t need to beat it further that that can cost you hundreds of thousands of dollars. And that example you gave of I think you said it was a community pharmacist friend of yours that went through a 10-year standard repayment, paid the maximum payment for 10 years, that was my situation. You know? And I think that as I look back on that journey, a little bit of knowledge would have saved me a ton of money along the way. And I want to also add, you know, your advice for the pre-pharmacy student I think is incredible because the reality is not all schools are created equal. And a lot of this data you can go out and look up in terms of what’s the board pass rate? What’s job placement like? What is the application acceptance rate into the College of Pharmacy? What’s the residency placement rate? And obviously, you know, there’s ranking that are out there, but they don’t represent many of the factors that are going to be most important to you as a graduate of a pharmacy school. So great stuff there. Travis, my last question for you is that my guess — just knowing our audience — is that we have lots of our community listening that’s feeling stuck with their student loans, feeling paralyzed, maybe feeling overwhelmed, don’t know where to start. What’s one piece of advice that you’d give to them that they can begin to get over that hump of feeling stuck or overwhelmed?

Travis Hornby: One piece of advice would be look at what your payment is. If you think that your payment is too high, take a look at Pay As You Earn or Revised Pay As You Earn and try to figure out whether or not your end goal is to go for full repayment and get to $0 in terms of the debt you owe, or if it’s to go for forgiveness. That would be the first big decision somebody has to make. So if you could at least figure out whether or not you need to go for forgiveness or repayment, that will help a lot because a lot of people, you can tell that in their actions, they don’t really know. They’ll throw an extra $200 at their highest interest rate loan when they have it, they’ll make a $5,000 one-time, lump sum payment to the smallest loan to get rid of it so they feel better psychologically, and that’s very, very indicative of just having no plan and no strategic direction at all with your loan repayment. So I would say that’s one piece of advice. One thing that I’d say is I forgot to say this when you asked student loan repayment mistakes. There’s a lot of residents out there who probably listen to your podcast.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Travis Hornby: The residents need to be on one of these income-driven programs while they’re still in residency.

Tim Ulbrich: And not deferring.

Travis Hornby: Yeah. A lot of people don’t realize that, but if your goal is to eventually pay your debt back, Revised Pay As You Earn can get you thousands of dollars in interest subsidies from the first month that you start paying on it. So if you’d like to have $5,000-10,000 less in debt by the end of your PGY1, PGY2 years, then get onto the Revised Pay As You Earn if your plan is to eventually pay the thing off. If your plan is not to eventually pay it off, you’re kind of unsure, then you might look at Pay As You Earn as well to try to build up credit for forgiveness. But that’s one mistake that I see people make all the time that I think people will continue to make because, you know, the residency programs are not as organized with as much detailed information for loan management as I think a lot of the human medicine physician type residency programs are because they’re a lot older and more resources are behind them. So that’s one thing that I’d say for your residents listening, but yeah. The big kind of direction, you know, you have to figure out if you’re going for full repayment or forgiveness. And that’s the big fork in the road, and that determines a whole bunch of the recommendations that we like to give. So like one thing we do is we figure that out for people or which path we think they should go down.

refinance student loans

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great advice for residents. And I probably see — the most common situation I see is deferment during residency, which for those that are thinking loan forgiveness, obviously deferment does not equal a qualifying payment, number one. But two, as look at the income-based repayment plans, then you know obviously depending on how that’s calculated, you know, there’s this automatic assumption that I can’t afford any payment. Well, do the math. Sit down and figure that out. And obviously, you’re going to begin to make that progress toward whether you’re going to pay them off and refinance them or whether you’re going to eventually pursue loan forgiveness. So Travis, obviously StudentLoanPlanner.com, our listeners can learn more about the work that you’re doing and the service you provide. Also, it’s my understanding you recently launched a podcast, the Student Loan Planner podcast. I’m assuming that’s available on iTunes, anywhere that you can find podcasts: Stitcher, Google Play, Spotify, etc. Beyond StudentLoanPlanner.com and the podcast, what’s the best place that our listeners can go to learn more about you and the work that you’re doing?

Travis Hornby: I would reach out to us, [email protected], and myself or somebody from our team will reach out and tell you what we think you’re dealing with and whether or not we think that you’d be a good fit for our services or not. And then if you want to just read more about pharmacists in particular, if you go to our blog, StudentLoanPlanner.com/blog, on the right hand side if you’re on a desktop, you’ll see our categories that we’ve written articles on, so there’ll be a pharmacist category that you can click and read everything we’ve ever written about pharmacy school and pharmacists. And it’s quite a lot at this point, so take a look at that if you’re looking for some free resources.
Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff. Travis, on behalf of the YFP community and the YFP team, thank you so much for taking the time to come on today’s show and looking forward to more collaborations in the future and having you back on to provide some more education to our audience.

Travis Hornby: Thanks for having me on, Tim.

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 081: New Year Financial Gameplan


New Year Financial Gameplan

On episode 81 of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker talk about a New Year financial gameplan to kick off 2019 the right way. Tim and Tim discuss 5 financial moves you should be making to ensure you get this year started off the right way.

Summary

On this episode, Tim & Tim dive right into 5 moves to make in your New Year financial gameplan. First on the list is setting financial goals by starting broad. Before digging into the numbers, ask yourself, what would define a successful 2019 financially? After taking some time to answer that and see how it fits with your year, you can bring it to a tangible level. This leads into the second financial move of New Year, new budget. YFP recommends following a zero-based budget. Tim Baker suggests going through your assets and liabilities and then doing a 90 day retroactive budget exercise. There you can view line items, track your expenses and see your spending. After, you’re able to see what your leftover amount is in savings. From there, you can use a savings allocation worksheet to prioritize additional goals, savings accounts, etc.

New Year tax filing and planning is the third financial move. Find a safe spot to collect all tax information and data. Often times, it’s helpful to work with someone who has an objective opinion on your financial situation. Ultimately, you need to find the best way to be proactive in your approach to taxes (DIY or using a tax prep service). The fourth financial move is to tidy up the important parts of your financial plan. This means revisiting or establishing an estate plan, insurance (life and disability), emergency funds, beneficiary information, investments, and making sure your legacy folder is current. The last financial move is to surround yourself with community that keeps you accountable and motivates you, like the YFP community.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to Episode 081 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Well, we have officially turned the page on 2018, are recovering, likely, from the financial hit that can be the month of December, and are ready to take 2019 head-on. We wrapped up 2018 by talking about 10 financial moves that you should make prior to the year’s end. So if you didn’t yet, check that out. Go back and take a listen, it’s not too late. So here, we are shifting our focus into setting your financial game plan for the new year. But before we talk through these financial moves we believe you should take to kick off the new year, Tim Baker, I believe we have a big congratulations to you and Shea that is in order. Give us the good news.

Tim Baker: Yeah, well, Merry Christmas, Tim. Happy New Year. Good to be back on the podcast. Yes, Shea and I got — we got engaged over the holiday.

Tim Ulbrich: Yay!

Tim Baker: Finally asked the question. So yeah, that’s really our good news. We’re really excited.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Excited for you guys and what lies ahead.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So wanted to make sure the community was aware of that good news as we head into 2019. So let’s do this — five financial moves that we think you should be making in the new year. No. 1, probably no surprise, setting financial goals for the new year. So Tim, when I think of this, I like to start broad and kind of think about what our goals and aspirations before you really dig into the numbers about what exactly do I have available per month and we get specific and measurable and all that. So why don’t you and I just talk broadly about 2019 in terms of things that are top of mind for us individually. We’ll obviously ask the listeners to do the same. So for you, 2019, I like to start by thinking of this question in terms of what would define a successful 2019 financially? So what’s top of mind for you and Shea?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think the big thing for us is like we’re starting basically to gut our house. And so that’s a major financial I guess stressor for us. So we’re trying to cash-flow as much as we can for kind of some of the incidentals so we’re not putting those into our mortgage. So that’s really our big one. So right now, we’re in the process of moving everything out of our house a couple doors down and get that process going. So I think beyond that, which again, is a big thing, it’s really going to be about making sure that our emergency fund is where it needs to be kind of post-move. I think really, monitoring creep in terms of our spending. So that’s a big one I think everyone deals with. So I think the house is going to really kind of rule the day in terms of our finances. We’ve both agreed that because we’re doing this major undertaking, we’re going to kind of do a little bit less in other areas like vacation and things like this because, you know, we really want to make sure that our house is where it needs to be and we’re not really kind of dipping into those, the waters of being house-poor and cash-poor. And I think another big thing for us is like as our family grows, looking at something like an au pair, I know we’ve talked about that in the past and basically being able to have enough money month-to-month to basically support that. So those are the two big things financially that we’re looking at and really, kind of it’s pre-planning for the house and then basically after we get into it. So how about you, Tim? Like what does that look like for you?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, you know, Jess and I have been obviously working with you on this. But I think for us, we made the move to Columbus in early October, new job started in November. I feel like right now, the dust is finally starting to settle. But I think we underestimated the impact of that transition, just both a little bit financially but even just emotionally, the impact on family and that what’s involved in a transition like that. So I feel like for us, it’s a lot kind of a reset back to some of the behaviors we had in terms of budgeting, goal setting and really getting a new foundation with new job and new differences of income and taxes and all of that and kind of getting back to norm. The other thing that’s top of mind for us is we have two cars that both have about 130,000 miles on them. So we haven’t done as great of a job as we would like — I mean, obviously, they’re paid off, which is good news, no car payments. But we’ve got to be thinking ahead either maintenance and/or purchasing new cars. And we just got slapped with a big, you know, about $2,500 repair bill on one of them that I think has brought this to the forefront a little bit for us and really being intentional about making sure that shouldn’t be an emergency, right?

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: We kind of know that’s coming, and we need to at least plan for one if not both of those. And then the other thing is we have some aspirations around purchasing a first rental property in 2019. So we are super excited/nervous/fearful/insert emotion, you know, when it comes to that. And I’m binging on BiggerPockets, as many of our listeners know, and I think that’s really helped get me fired up. But one of the themes I keep hearing from so many of those that are on that show is, you know, it could be easy to kind of write the script of fear when it comes to real estate investing. And you know, you want to take risk. But it should be calculated risk. And I think I tend to probably think that that risk is greater than it is and wanting to really jump in and make that a part of our financial plan in 2019. So I think starting, as you kind of heard Tim and I talk through those in broad terms, what we didn’t do there is we didn’t put numbers to them yet, right? We didn’t put a date to them. And while we can’t put them yet into our budget, we’re going to get there here in a minute. It’s the beginnings of a conversation, either with you and your spouse and significant other, or maybe it’s just you alone about what would a successful 2019 look like? And take some time and answer that question and have fun answering that question, dream a little bit. And I think, Tim, for me, there’s this balance of doing this between not settling but also being aspirational on some regard, right? I think it’s easy to kind of look at things the way they were and say, OK, I’ve only got $100 a month, and I’m going to settle into what was. And I think it’s good to push yourself and to challenge yourself to think creatively about how those goals can be achieved. But obviously, you don’t want to be unrealistic either. So as you begin this conversation with clients around goal-setting, how do you do this? What direction do you take?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I really think of it as more of like a life plan. And we use the financial situation to really support that. So you know, when I ask a question of like — so when we do kind of like a success timeline, and we say — this is what I do with new clients is like, OK, if we get in our imaginary time machine, it’s December 27, 2018, and we go ahead two years, and we go to December 27, 2020, what does success look like? And really have them visualize that in that sense. So we kind of start there. But I think like most people, they say, is it financial success? And I’m like, I’m just talking success in general, you know. So to me, if it’s about exercise or personal development, to me, that has to be built in there because oftentimes, like that requires some type of like financial — I have a lot of clients that — and this used to me back in the day — they would spend a lot of money on races and traveling to different places to run half marathons or even like personal development courses or things like that or books or whatever. So to me, that’s all part of it and having a bucket of money set aside. So I think I don’t really separate the finances from I guess kind of the overall goals because to me, they’re very much intertwined. And it’s funny too because I get a lot of clients, like especially when we first go through this — and I know it happens in my household — but when we first go through this, I’ll ask a question of one of the spouses, and the other spouse is kind of like, you know, craning their neck and they’re like, I can’t believe that’s important to you or that’s even a thing for you — you know, good or bad, but it’s like, we don’t take the time to verbalize these things. And I know in our household, I feel like we often have the same conversation, but we come to different points of understanding. And then time erodes that. So I think writing it down and getting it on paper too is a good thing because our memories fade and even if we’re — I think we do a pretty good job in our household of kind of talk through where we want to go, but sometimes, you know, there’s two parties to that conversation. And sometimes, we just remember it differently or how to go about it. So I think just having the conversation with yourself and really your significant other, if that’s your case, is the first step because — I don’t know about you, Tim, but like I just have a lot of things running through my head, and to verbalize them and get them out onto paper is probably the majority of the step that needs to be taken. So I think that’s where having an objective third party just say, “Hey, these are questions you probably won’t ask yourself. I’m going to ask them, I’m going to get the heck out of the way, and we’ll just see where this takes us.” I think that’s important.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I want to echo that. I think you did a great job — you have done and continue to do a great job of that with Jess and I. And we’ve talked before on the podcast about episodes 032, 033, where you walked us through some of those big dream questions about your why. And that’s a little bit about what we’re talking here. I mean, a little more granular on a year-long basis, but obviously, even before you think about 2019, I think what we’re encouraging you to do is think about the long-term vision. What is the end goal? What are you trying to achieve? Why are you trying to achieve it? And then you back into what needs to happen in 2019 that’s going to help you get there and making sure you’re prioritizing things appropriately. I know one of the mistakes I have made, Tim, and I know many others have made as well, is we tend to want to start with the budget. And I think that’s difficult, especially with a spouse or significant other. One, because it’s hard to know where you are trying to go to if you haven’t yet defined what are those goals and what you’re doing. And I think it instantly brings in some points of contention, and you’re focusing on the weeds and the numbers. But I know for Jess and I, we can sit down and we can have these conversations and we can dream big and then kind of back into reality and get on the same page. The budgeting process — I’m not going to say it’s easy, but it becomes easier because we’ve already talked about the goals and aspirations that we have together.

Tim Baker: Right. And a lot of people have the opposite problem is that they do the goals, but they never look at the budget because I think they’re afraid to. And that’s very common as well. So you know, I think at the end of the day, it doesn’t have to be perfect. And we would like to connect the dots to, you know, in terms of like what’s past behavior? How is money flowing through the household? To OK, can we account for every dollar that’s going to every goal? And sometimes, that’s just not reality. And that’s fine. But I think what it does is when you introduce all of these goals, whether it’s the home purchase or a vacation or you want to buy a car in the future or whatever that is or upping your retirement game, money is a finite resource, so when push comes to shove and we’re looking at, OK, where is this extra money going if there is extra money — and hopefully that there is extra money — then that’s when we really talk about prioritization and OK, what do we focus on first? What is most important? So some people don’t get to that step because it’s just, it’s too overwhelming for them or the “b” word is so — it’s like ash in their mouth. But I think a measure of kind of looking at goals and aspiration and a measure of practicality of OK, how are we actually going to back into these things is good. And again, you know, I think also having — some people, when I work with them, they’re like, well, tell me what you think I should do. And I give them my opinion based on my thoughts and I think the tone of the conversation and what’s important to them, but I also, I sprinkle in kind of, “This is what the textbook says too. And this may not be the best thing for you,” but I think those are good things to kind of talk through. And a lot of this is just, again, out in the open, talking through the issue. And then I think that brings clarity. If you’re kind of a one-person show or if you’re married and you’re basically calling the shots by yourself, maybe your spouse is not as engaged in the process, to me, you can get in your own head. And you really — not that you lose your way, but I think fleshing things out with an individual, whether it’s your spouse or someone else, is super important.

Tim Ulbrich: So I think for those that are listening and say, “Alright, Tim and Tim. I’ve got it. Goals are where I need to go,” and are looking for a tangible follow-up to do here, my recommendation would be go to episodes 032, 033, where Tim Baker and I talked through with Jess and I some big questions on finding your why. Ask yourself those same questions. If you listened to Episode 079, we had Nick Ornelia on. He actually talked about going through that process himself and how powerful and impactful that was. Then, begin to back into 2019, what are some of the things that you have as goals, based on that bigger picture of purpose and why and what you’re trying to do. And then get down to the tangible level. So we’ve all been taught in school, when you have goals, they need to be specific, measurable. They need to realistic, they need to be time-bound. And we talk about in “Seven Figure,” the book, “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” also adding a why to that. So if you’re somebody that says, OK, I’ve got $150,000 in student loan and I want to get that paid off in five years, you actually add a date to that. So by what date would I like to have that paid off? And what’s the reason why I want to do this? What else am I trying to accomplish, which obviously provides some of the motivation along the way. Once we get to this level where we have 2019 goals, we have some dates, we have some aspirations, we have exactly what we’re trying to do numbers-wise — so for example, for Jess and I, you know, maybe we say by December 31, 2019, we want to have $20,000 saved for our car sinking fund — now we can begin to then get into Step No. 2, which is making those goals become a reality through the budgeting process. So Tim Baker, No. 2 here is a new year, new budget. And so you know we’re big fans of the zero-based budget. For those that need a budgeting template, head on over to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/budget, and you can download and Excel sheet, and we’ll kind of walk you through what we’re going to talk about here. But we really believe Step No. 1, as we begin thinking about this transition from goals becoming a reality through the budgeting is tracking expenses. So talk us through where people can get started with tracking expenses to begin to calculate what are they working with each month to fund these goals.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so there’s a lot of different tools that you can use to really, whether it’s Mint or YNAB or Giveaway, like there’s a lot of things that you can use. There’s a free resource on my website, Script Financial. Basically, what it does is you link your accounts, it builds a dynamic basically balance sheet, so you can see all of your assets, all of your liabilities, and then you actually can look at to see how based on what you’ve connected, whether it’s credit card or checking account, you can see how money is flowing in and how it’s being basically categorized across the various, whether it’s housing or loan payments or whatever. So those are really a good way to kind of get baseline data. I think what often happens is when people look at, you know, the budget process exercise, you see it with people that are training for races that are kind of haven’t done it, they want to get off the couch and run a marathon right away, and sometimes they end up hurting themselves or quitting. And what I really implore clients when I kind of first work with them is our process is to kind of go through the balance sheet and say, “OK, these are all your assets. These are all your liabilities,” get a nice picture of where everything is and what it looks like. And then we do that 90-day retroactive budget exercise where the idea is if you have $10,000 coming in in income, so this is basically your take-home pay, as we walk through and we looked at how much money, we kind of have an idea on what our average is. So in the tool, it shows you, on average over the last three months, you spent $400 on your cat Snuffy. And then for a lot of people, they’re like, “Oh, that’s not good.” So I say, “Well, what’s a good number?” And they automatically want to say it’s $100. But maybe that might not be the reality. So sometimes we go chalk, meaning we take the average. But sometimes they’ll say, “Well, it’s kind of an outlier that Snuffy had surgery,” or whatever, so a realistic number is maybe $200 a month. So the idea is as we go through all of those line items, if $10,000 is coming in, and we have $9,000 that’s going out, in a zero-based budget, essentially what that tells me is that we have $1,000, more or less, to play with in terms of whether it’s increasing money that we’re putting towards loans or there’s basically a line item that is savings. So we might look at that $1,000 and say, “OK. Half of that we want to put towards, per month, we want to put towards maxing out our Roth IRA,” which is what the $500 times 12 months, that’s $6,000. That would max out your IRA. And maybe the other money goes for a different goal. So I think the exercise itself kind of shines a light on how money is flowing through. So on the flip side of that, Tim, you know, if we add up all of those and realistically, the number is typically more conservative because we just have leakage and things that we don’t really account for in that process. If $10,000 is going out, then it means one of two things. It either means that we’re eating into our savings or we’re running some type of credit card debt, and we’re basically running a deficit with our spending. So I think just getting a snapshot of where we’re at is important. And then a lot of those from there, it’s tracking your expenses. And again, like to me, one of the things that I preach is that it’s a two-sided equation, so I always try to impress upon clients to think of other ways to make income, grow the top line, because you can really only cut so much. And again, in this day and age, it’s always good to have alternative income streams than just like the W2 income that’s coming in. So things like that I think are important as we’re kind of going down the path of how to properly fund these goals.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I love hearing you talk through — I mean, I think what this does if we merge steps 1 and 2 here — 1 being the goals, 2 here being the budget — is that you start with the goals in mind and then you work into, OK, based on the last 90 days, what do I have available? And you start to merge the two of these together. And I think what typically happens — I know it happened for Jess and I as we just did this last week with you — is that you get to your goals and your aspirations, and then you get to the reality of what is there. And you say, “I don’t like that reality,” right? So there’s not enough monthly income that’s not being spent on expenses, that’s freed up to put toward our goals, so we either now need to grow the top line, cut the expenses, or both, right? And then you start to really get into the questions of, what can I cut? Or how can I grow my income? And as you mentioned, it’s on both sides. So I think this merging of the goals and the budget really helps not only put it into reality, but it also helps drive some of the motivation to be able to achieve these goals. So I think the next step here — and you alluded to it a little bit — is this idea of what you do with your clients, which I love, is a savings allocation worksheet.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So once we kind of begin to think about the goals and then we do this 90-day retroactive tracking of expenses, we now get into putting these into a category of what goal, how much am I trying to achieve? What do I need per month to get there? What can I do current versus what do I need to be doing? And then prioritizing those. So talk us through that process and how you do that with clients.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I found that there was like a disconnect between kind of these steps. So one of the things I developed is this — I call it the savings allocation template. And it’s essentially like all of my clients have one. And it’s really just an Excel sheet. You know, it’s funny, like all of these pieces of software that are fancy, like I find that more and more I use kind of my own homemade thing. So essentially, what it is is it’s basically a spreadsheet that kind of shows what are our primary everyday spending accounts. So for some people, it might be Bank of America or USAA or whatever that is. And essentially, that’s where all of the money flows through. And then sometimes we have like a backup account just to make kind of a buffer. And then we have our emergency fund, which is that deep storage where we never touch. And then we might have like retirement accounts that are more for long-term savings. But then we have these, kind of these tweener accounts. And really, these are what we’re talking about in terms of like sinking funds. So most people — I think if you’re doing it correctly, in my opinion — are going to have things like a home maintenance, a car maintenance fund, a gift or a holiday fund. So a lot of people, they’ll say, “Hey, Tim, I do a really good job 11 months of the year, but then Christmas rolls around, and I blow my budget out of the water.” So typically, my question is, “Well, how much do you spend during the holidays?” Say for simple math, the answer is $1,200, then I say, “OK. In January 2019, this month, let’s set up a sinking fund. We’re going to call it ‘Gift, Holiday Fund,’ whatever, and every month from January 2019 to December 2019, we’re going to fund $100. So by the end of that month, or by the end of that year, we have $1,200, so essentially replicates spending. And really, we’re not getting into credit card debt or anything. But that money is there. So the idea behind the savings allocation sheet is to kind of get everything on one page and then it shows kind of the location of the account, what the monthly contribution is, so this is kind of what we’re talking about now — so typically, this is blank until we figure it out — what the current balance is, what the target is, what the source is — this could be paycheck or it could be moonlight shifts, or it could be Airbnb, which is kind of like what I talked about in the past with our travel fund — and then the description of what it’s actually for. So the example that I give for our travel fund, I said, “Hey, Shea, my buddies, we’re going to Vegas for a bachelor party. I really want to use the travel fund.” We look at the description, she’s like, “Sorry, bro. That’s for family vacations only, so you’ve got to find that money somewhere else.” But it keeps us honest, and it keeps us on the same page. So our car maintenance fund is for, you know, car repairs, oil changes, tires. For our home fund, we have the things that we know we need to spend money on in the future. And I think another field that I would add to this is, you know, we have kind of the current balance and the target. So if your emergency fund, it needs to be $20,000, and you have $15,000 in it, and you’re funding it $1,000 per month, then you essentially have five months until it’s fully funded, if you’re running at a clip. I think getting that on paper too, I think one of the things we talked about last time, Tim, was, OK, if we contribute to the emergency fund at this clip, it’s going to take us three years to fund it. Is that acceptable? So I think if when we look at it in that context, then you’re going to say, “Well, no, not really. It’s not.” Or you might look at it differently and say, “Yeah, that’s fine. We have cash there, and we’re building it up over time.” So I think that’s the piece. But it’s amazing, like we talk about kind of the small wins, and I think sinking funds are a big thing, but I think actually looking at this — and I equate it to almost like the debt roll down method in reverse. So we talk about when a debt is paid off, we basically roll that payment into the next one. So same thing, it’s like when our target balance is achieved, and in that example I gave you, you had $1,000 that’s going into the emergency fund, then essentially, we free up that $1,000 to now fund your travel fund or whatever it is. And I think that’s when we kind of talk about priorities. Do we do a lot of one thing? Or do we do a little of a lot of things in terms of spreading the dollars out?

Tim Ulbrich: And I think, again, just to reinforce for our listeners to not underestimate the power of writing down your goals and how you’re going to achieve them. I just pulled up right now the allocation worksheet you and Jess and I were working on, so we have things on here like additional giving and gifts, like you mentioned, vacation, home improvement fund, emergency funds, car sinking funds, different retirement accounts, and then we have the 529 accounts for the boys, real estate investing, paying down home early. And after we prioritized them, which is another step of this process, I see here a bunch of areas that it really pisses me off that we’re not able to contribute to these right now, right? Because of other things we’re trying to do. And so I think there’s that motivational factor of, OK, what needs to change? What do we need to do to make these a priority and make them happen? And obviously, there’s patience there as well. And so the next step of this is once you have your goals and once you have this allocation worksheet and you have the budget set and you prioritize these items, you then begin to put these on automation, which is what we’re talking about here with the sinking funds. And so I would point our listeners back to Episode 057, we talked about the power of automating a financial plan and we have some more detailed information there. OK, No. 1 we talked about is setting goals for the new year. No. 2 is new year, new budget. No. 3 is a new year tax filing and planning for 2019. So in Episode 070, you and Paul had talked about kind of pre-planning for the tax season. And so here we are, January, and for me, there’s really two buckets that we’re thinking about is what we need to do to file 2018 returns and then obviously, the strategic planning for 2019. So what should our listeners be thinking about? Here we are, January 2019, and what they need to do in terms of filing and probably the most common question we get here is what are the pros and cons of DIY, TurboTax, versus hiring and working with a professional on this.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So I think the big thing is as tax documents come in, you know, basically having a safe spot, a known spot, to basically gather all those and collect all those. I think that’s the big one. There are still things that you can do between January, this month, to April 15 that can affect your tax bill. So I think understanding that is important. So you know, right now, I think it should be about data collection, looking at where we’re at. But then as we kind of transition to alright, now we’re ready to file, what’s the best step? So for some people, it might be a TurboTax. It’s fairly easy. Now, the changes in the tax code makes the tax picture a little bit different. It’s supposed to be easier. It’s supposed to be a lot easier, but I think it’s about the same as far as what I’ve looked at and what I’ve read in terms of the new tax code. But again, it’s the same thing with goal-setting and a lot of this stuff is sometimes, it’s worth an objective opinion. And I would say the big win with Paul with a lot of clients that we’ve had is, you know, actually looking at — you know, we’re talking about midway through last year — looking at if nothing changes midway through, “Hey, client, you’re going to owe $6,000, $8,000, or we’re going to get back that amount of money.” And both of those things are not necessarily optimal outcomes. A lot of people — for some people, it is, because if they get back $6,000, it’s really the only way they can save, unfortunately. But that’s really a tax-free loan to the government. And on the flip side of that, no one really preps for or prepares for a large tax bill to Uncle Sam. And it happens if residents are moving from a residency salary to a regular pharmacist salary or life event changes, baby, increase in income, home purchase, a lot of these things can move the needle. So again, like we preach being proactive with this. And I think what we want to do in really this time of year is start the process of filing, especially if you’re going to get some type of return. File early, and then look ahead for 2019 and say, “OK. What are the things that we can do to affect change so we can be as efficient with the money that we’re sending Uncle Sam.” So for some people, it’s going to make sense to DIY it. And that’s more than OK for some people, especially if they have multiple states or things like that, it makes sense to kind of slow down and say, “OK. Tax permeates everything. What’s the best way to plan for this and be proactive in the approach?” And I think that’s the difference is I think the act of filing taxes is very transactional, it’s very reactive. But I think the planning piece can make it a lot more pleasant if you kind of get in front of it and make sure that you’re doing what you need to do to better your tax situation.

refinance student loans

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that’s a goal we have for our community and audience is to really shift the mindset from just the filing, the transaction, to actually the strategic planning around taxes, you know, being intentional with the individual situations that everyone has and really — obviously, we’re not trying to deviate the tax code in any way, shape or form but really trying to look at all things considered, all those variables you mentioned, what can we be doing in advance of next year’s filing to be strategic to maximize the individual plan for each and every person? So really, thinking much more proactively about taxes than I think reactively.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: So I would point our listeners to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/taxprep, where you and your team with Paul offer a service to both do the filing as well as kind of looking ahead to the strategic planning of the new year. Alright, No. 4 here is a bucket of things that I’m calling tidying up the not-so-sexy but oh-so-important parts of your financial plan. So Tim, what are some of the things that our listeners heading into the new year probably often may not get the same attention that maybe student loans or saving for retirement, but some of the foundational, maybe more of the defensive things people need to be thinking about if they haven’t yet done putting a plan in place for 2019 to get it done?

Tim Baker: Yeah. I think you hit it on the head, Tim. I think it’s so much of the defensive things that don’t get the sizzle that things like, you know, the controversy over PSLF or the student loans because it’s a main pain point or investments, Roth conversions, that type of thing. It’s really about setting yourself up for good defense. So like I have a lot of prospective clients that came in the door, and they rattle off a bunch of things that they want to achieve or accomplish. And when I ask the question of like, “Do we have an estate plan in place?” which is super important because you own a house, you have kids, and the answer is no, then I need to impress upon them how important that actually is because what we don’t want to do is we don’t want some judge in the state of Wisconsin, Ohio, Florida, wherever it is, basically deciding who’s going to be guardian for your kids or how your body’s going to be treated in the event of incapacity or how your affairs are going to be handled in death. So it’s not something that is sexy or that we like to talk about, but it’s also typically one of the things that we don’t know what we don’t know. So I like to elevate that. To me, that’s where I think a good planner kind of elevates that. And I think that’s, again, it kind of goes back to one of the things that you said, Tim, is we worked together for a long time, and we get around to investments because, you know, most people, there’s other things that we need to tackle before we hit the investment piece. And I think this is one of the things too is, you know, yeah, I got it, we want to do Roth conversions, we want to make sure that the 401k is properly allocated, all that stuff. But if you kind of fall into those buckets — especially if there’s kiddos involved, having a proper estate plan is super important. So that would be the big thing, and some employers offer this as part of employment that you might pay a little bit more for legal, but I would definitely recommend talking to an attorney. And I know you and Jess talked to the person that I work with, and I think it was a big win for you guys. But I think that would be No. 1 is looking at that and making sure that we’re good in that regard.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and just to build off of that, we did. We just finished up that work, we’re reviewing the documents right now. And I had gone the DIY approach a couple years ago and really underestimated the power and the value of the conversation. Again, third party, different viewpoint. You know, Jess and I may be thinking about it one way, him asking questions, getting us to think about the different documents, and even some nuances and implications around life insurance policies and where other things go and how assets are handled and establishments of trusts and all those things that I would have never gathered through a template form. So I think that’s one that, you know, maybe for many people feels overwhelming, not only the topic in and of itself, but just the some of the legalese and working with somebody and all that. But I think it’s a good goal for many of our listeners to think about in 2019 if they haven’t yet done so.

Tim Baker: And at the end of the day, it’s really not about you. And the next things that we’re going to talk about is also not about you. You know, when you’re talking about estate planning, this is really about your family, your survivors. And a lot of people, it’s like, well, I won’t be here, I don’t have to really worry about it. But again, if you have a family to look after, I think it’s important to get this right and spending a little bit of money I think is well advised. So I think the next part of this, you know, some other not-so-sexy but oh-so-important parts of the financial plan would be your insurance game, you know. And again, I think that a lot of advisors will lead with this because, you know, a crappy permanent insurance or disability policy can pay a lot of premiums and typically, you know, I see a lot of people that don’t necessarily have what they need or they’ll over buy or whatever that is, but I think at the end of the day, looking at do you have enough term to basically cover what you need to cover? And again, if you have dependents, that’s going to be better. From a disability insurance where we’re talking about insuring the income that you earn, when you have dependents and you’re at the stage of life where you have spent a lot of time, energy, blood, sweat, tears to get the PharmD, you want to make sure that you protect that. So if it’s a simple calculation for life, which could be 10-12x your income to get that policy in place, so maybe that’s a $1 million term, which is cheaper than you think for — I kind of use, we talked about the rule of 30. For a 30-year-old who buys a $500,000 30-year term policy, it’s about $30 a month. So a lot of people think that’s a lot more. And then disability policy, you probably want something that is own occupation, which means it covers for your occupation. And you want something that’s around 60% of your gross monthly income. So a lot of people, again, they overlook this. And you know, this is as important as some of the other things that we’ve talked about, the investment, the emergency fund, all that kind of stuff. And then that’s the next thing is really — is your emergency fund up-to-date and current? So Tim, you said you mentioned kind of life changing, moving to Columbus, we re-assessed the emergency fund, and we saw, OK, we probably need to plus it up a little bit. Same for our household. I love to just watch that money sit and get its 2% from Ally every month. Like it’s a beautiful thing. But you know, do we have enough cash reserves for the unthinkable to happen and be good with that? And then in terms of some of the other things, you know, updating beneficiary information on your investment accounts — do you have a primary beneficiary? Do you have a contingent beneficiary? And make sure that’s current. And to circle back to the estate planning stuff is, you know, is your legacy folder, is that current? Is it even in existence? And basically talking through with loved ones about, “Hey, this is if something were to happen to me, this is my LastPass account. This is where you look for everything.” And make sure. Because again, a lot of people think it will happen to someone else, but at the end of the day, the odds are is that this will happen to one of our listeners, and it’s important to be prepared for that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and if you haven’t heard us talk about that on the show before, legacy folder, that’s a play off of Dave Ramsey’s content. He talks about this in Financial Peace University, having all of your financial documents, insurance policies, birth certificates, investment account logons, you name it, in one place where people or whomever, one person, knows where that is in the event that you need it, whether that’s spouse, significant other, or obviously extended family. So we have a document, YourFinancialPharmacist.com/legacyfolder that is a list of things that you may consider including in there. And Tim, just to put a bow on this and kind of wrap up the things you had talked about, I think for those that are listening and say, “Estate planning: check. Life and disability: check. Emergency fund: check,” it’s really going back and asking the questions, if you already have those in place, to your point, are they up-to-date? And do they align with your current financial situation? So I know, for example, I mentioned Jess and I have the estate plan, we kind of looked at that and said, “Yeah, we did it. But we didn’t really do it as well as we could have or should have.” And it didn’t represent, I think our current status of our family, and it probably won’t again in three years, and we’ll have to update it. Life and disability is one that we’re working with you on right now to say, “OK, when we purchased a life insurance policy three years ago, our financial situation, our family situation is very different.” And so we’re at a point now of needing to kind of up those policies. Same with the emergency fund that you mentioned. So really going back and looking to say, “Are these policies representative, are these parts of the financial plan representative of current status of what’s going on?”

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I had a prospective client ask me this and actually became a client. They basically said is like, “I kind of understand how you work through the financial plan. But then like what do we do after that?” And it’s like, you know, is there work to do? And I was like, “Well, you know, if you look back two years and what you were doing two years ago, is that different than what it looks like today?” And inevitably, it’s like yeah. So the beauty of the financial plan — to nerd out a little bit — is that it’s fluent. And life happens, so I feel like asking the question, like does this make sense today is valid across all part of the financial plan. And for some people, you know, they’re going to move from the accumulation phase of, say, their 529, they’re saving for little Johnny’s education, to actually the distribution phase, which looks a lot like retirement in terms of like how can we set up a plan, you know, your kid’s in middle school, high school, and make sure that we know exactly what we’re paying for college down to the penny and how we’re going to fund that. And you know, it sounds — you know, a lot of people kind of get stuck in the here and now and where we’re currently headed, but we forget how much life changes over time. Even in your case, Tim, when we talked about, when we looked back at kind of your goals, some of them made a lot of sense. But then you had a lot of things change as well. Again, I think that’s where it’s good — and I even have problems with this in my life — but it’s good to kind of slow down and ask the questions like, “Do we like where we’re going? Does this still make sense?” You know, has something basically come up that’s now more important? And then really adjusting the plan accordingly. So and that’s one of the reasons I’ve been on my soap box — that’s really the reason I like to work with young people is that you can come in completely scattered or in a tough spot, but I think the fact that we have time to really right the ship and get the plan going is a beautiful thing. So.

Tim Ulbrich: And if those listening, you know, maybe you have a question about life and disability, emergency funds, all these things we’ve talked about, taxes, you know, we have so many resources on the website, YourFinancialPharmacist.com. We’ve got guides and calculators and links to previous content. So head on over there, search the topic that you’re looking for, and if there’s not something there that you’re looking for, let us know. No. 5 and finally, you know, probably the quickest one that we’ll talk about but maybe the most important is surrounding yourself with community that one, keeps you accountable and two, motivates you to learn and better yourself financially each and every day. So we’ve talked before about the YFP Facebook group, and our challenge for those of you that are listening that are not yet a part of that group, number one, it’s free. Number two, there’s multiple conversations going on each and every day: people posing a question, something they’re struggling with, a win that they had. Please join us in that community. I think you’ll find it incredibly helpful and valuable just to stay sharp when it comes to your own financial plan and what you’re working on. And number two is obviously when it comes to accountability and finding somebody that can motivate you and help you learn, of course, the comprehensive financial planning services. So Tim Baker, we’re of course proud to be partnering with him, ScriptFinancial.com. You can head over to that website, schedule a free call, see if it’s a good fit for you. And Tim, from what you’ve seen working with clients, whether it’s accountability and community with a significant other, a spouse or a planner or some other form or fashion, I mean, how important is this aspect of accountability and community?

Tim Baker: I think it’s huge. You know, I think when I start with clients and we do kind of a wealth building survey, which is built on kind of “The Millionaire Next Door” and the research that was done there, you know, pharmacists grade out very highly in things like responsibility, but from an accountability measurement or like a focus measurement, sometimes they don’t — or a confidence measurement, sometimes they don’t. And that’s where we kind of lose the way. So again, my job in essence from a behavioral standpoint is to kind of nudge you in the right direction. And sometimes, it’s just as easy as bringing up the savings allocation, kind of the goal and the success timeline and saying, “OK. Where are we at? And where are we going?” And you know, I love the community that we’re building because I think it was — I know I heard it through Tim first, I think he stole it from someone else — Tim Ferriss is the author of “The 4-Hour Workweek,” is that you’re the average of like your five closest friends or things like that, something like that. And I think when you surround yourself with people or community that are like-minded, in essence, or are cheering each other on to kind of change their situation, I think that’s where you really start to see action. So that can be a community, working with your spouse, it can be working with an advisor. But at the end of the day, I think the accountability is such a huge piece of it. And I often say to clients, like you know, “You guys can look up how to do a Roth conversion, what you need an emergency fund and where, but at the end of the day, I think it’s that objective voice in the room that says, ‘Does this make sense?’ and ‘Is this still important?’ And if it is, where’s the money? Where’s the bucket? Where’s the resources to say that it is imporant and we’re going to see it through?” So yeah, I think it’s probably the most important part of the financial plan is really pushing it forward and being accountable to what we’ve laid out.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. We’ve talked before, it’s not — the x’s and o’s are important, but what is more important is the execution, which comes down to accountability and community and upping your financial IQ. And I’m feeling that right now, I mean, we’re finishing up a book club in the YFP Book Club Facebook group on “Rich Dad, Poor Dad,” and it’s been to facilitate that, but even seeing the conversation, you know, we’re one month in, and I think like we talk about the compound growth of your investments, there’s a much more or equal significance of the growth of your financial IQ that can happen through reading a book each month or every month or whatever that the cumulative effect of that, you cannot underestimate that. So I hope you’ll join us in the YFP community if you’re not already a part of that group. And before we wrap up today’s show, just another reminder about our first giveaway of the year. We’re doing three yearly subscriptions to the budgeting software, YNAB, again, standing for You Need A Budget. Head on over to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/giveaway to enter that contest today. As always, we appreciate you joining us for this week’s episode. And if you haven’t done so, please leave a review of this show in iTunes and make sure to subscribe, whether that be in iTunes or whatever podcast player that you get your content each and every week. We’re grateful for your listenership, and we look forward to joining you again next week. Have a great rest of your week.

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

Join the YFP Community!

YFP 079: Is It Time to Redefine Retirement?


Is It Time to Redefine Retirement?

On episode 079, Tim Ulbrich, co-founder of Your Financial Pharmacist, interviews Dr. Nick Ornella, a 2009 graduate of Ohio Northern University, about his journey paying off his student loans in 10 months and shortly after taking one year off to travel the world. Tim and Nick share thoughts of what it means to redefine retirement and why the concept of mini-retirements are gaining traction. They finish the show up by getting practical with 7 steps you can take to plan for a year off.

About Today’s Guest

Nick Ornella is a 2009 graduate of Ohio Northern University’s College of Pharmacy. He began working for Walgreens when he graduated. Nick was able to pay off his student loans within 10 months. In 2016, he decided to take a year long leave of absence from work to travel. Nick spent an entire year traveling around the western United States, Europe, and east Africa. In 2018, he married his wife, Alanna, and they currently live in Cincinnati. Nick is now back to working for Walgreens as a pharmacy manager. Nick also created a blog called the Young Professional’s Guide to a Year Off to tell the story of his year off and to show other young professionals how to take extended time off work to travel.

Summary

On this episode, Tim Ulbrich interviews Dr. Nick Ornella, a 2009 Ohio Northern University graduate. Nick knew in high school that he wanted to become a pharmacist and began taking the necessary steps to do so. His parents helped to financially support his college career. Nick worked hard in school to earn scholarships from Ohio Northern University that helped to offset his indebtedness. He worked as an intern at Walgreens during school and took advantage of their tuition reimbursement program. At graduation, he had accrued $35,000 in debt.

Nick went to work the day he became a licensed pharmacist. He wanted to build a strong financial foundation and decided to live with his parents so that he could pay off his student loans as quickly as possible. After paying off his loans, he started 401(k) contributions and maxed them out. He avoided big purchases, aside from a 2011 Audi A5, lived humbly in a small apartment, didn’t use a credit card or rack up any credit card debt and minimized costs any way he could.

Nick was fed up with his job and decided, after a lot of contemplation a research, that he wanted to take a year off of work to travel. He had a nice nest egg in his 401(k) and $40,000 in his savings account with no other debt. He purchased several books on how he could travel frugally and for additional inspirational stories and information to help make this long-time dream a reality. He decided he was all in and would have no regrets. He was able to receive a leave of absence from work giving him the ability to take a year off to travel several places in the U.S., Europe and Africa. During his travels, he found himself often living in the present moment and truly finding contentment in his life, a feeling he had never experienced before.

Nick has come to realize that the concept of retirement needs to be rethought and that it’s important to step out of the rat race of work to create pockets of time that you can truly enjoy. Since his return, he created a blog and also lays out 7 financial steps to take a year off.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to Episode 079 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. We have a special treat for you on today’s show, Dr. Nick Ornelia, Walgreens pharmacist, fellow Ohio Northern University alum — go Polar Bears — and blogger at Young Professionals Guide to a Year Off. He’s going to share his journey of crushing it to pay off his student loans and shortly after, taking one year off to travel the world. Nick, welcome to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast.

Nick Ornelia: Hi, Tim. Thanks for having me. Really honored to be here on the podcast.

Tim Ulbrich: Super excited to have you. And I’m fired up about talking about this topic. We’ve actually had lots of interest. People write in about this concept of retirement, should we be thinking about retirement in a different way? Many people know of Tim Ferriss’ work in the 4-hour work week, where he talks about this concept of mini-retirements. We’ll get there, but first, I want to take our listeners — and I don’t know if you’ll remember this, Nick, all the way back to January 4th, 2016, I actually pulled up my email before we were recording — brand new, the Your Financial Pharmacist blog had just started, and you wrote me an email. And the subject line was, “Taking a year off of work.” And I’m going to read this email quick because I think it’s going to set the stage for our conversation today and obviously, show our listeners of what you executed on in taking this year off. So you said, “Hello. Just wanted to know if you’ve ever heard of a pharmacist taking a year off work to travel and/or spend more time with family. If so, what kind of financial impact did that have on them? And what kind of difficulty did they have rejoining the workforce as a pharmacist? Thanks, Nick.” So Nick, with that in mind, give us the back story at this point in time, almost three years ago, when you were thinking about this idea of taking a year off. What was stimulating this interest for you? And maybe what fears were going on in your mind at that time?

Nick Ornelia: That’s incredible that you still have that email because I was scouring the internet at that time, trying to find any kind of example of any pharmacist or similar healthcare professional who had done something similar, just to see kind of like what their experience was and to get some information. And your blog popped up, and actually, I recognized your name. I knew you had gone to Ohio Northern. So I shot you that email, and you know, your response and your quick reply was actually a big kind of help for me, kind of a push out the door. So I will forever be grateful to the Financial Pharmacist for that. But the idea had been kind of brewing in my mind for probably at least a year before then, probably even longer. I had heard about people taking gap years, taking extended time off, maybe like after college or a sabbatical at some point in their career. So the idea was always in the back of my mind as a possibility that sounded pretty awesome and pretty cool, and maybe someday, I can do that. But I’d never really given it too much though until probably about April of 2015, so this was about a year before I started my year off. I was in a long-term relationship at the time. And it wasn’t going as I had hoped it to go. We ended up being two completely different people, and that day I remember in April, I remember we got in a big argument, and it just wasn’t my day. I was having a bad day. A bad day at work, I was kind of fed up with everything. And I went down into the basement, and I ordered three different books off of Amazon. And one of them was the book that you just mentioned, “The 4-Hour Workweek” by Timothy Ferriss. Another one was called, “Vagabonding” by Rolf Potts. And then the third one was, “How to Travel the World on $50 a day.” And that right there was like the first tangible step that I took that kind of set me on that path. And I read those books in a matter of days, and from that point on, it was a daily thing where I thought about it, I dreamed about it. And I really at that point, wanted to make it happen. So as I said, I was in that relationship and later that October, I believe it was, October 2015, about six months before I started the whole year of travel, that relationship ended amicably. We just realized we weren’t right for each other. And the day that that relationship ended, which was probably the hardest day of my life up to this point, very difficult, but that was the day that I decided to go through with it, to take the year off and to jump into it and have no regrets about it.

Tim Ulbrich: So Nick, when you emailed me, you didn’t talk about financial fears, per say, but I’m guessing there were things at the time you were thinking about as a young practitioner, 2009 graduate, maybe fears around whether it’s job security or am I going to be delaying retirement? All these things. I mean, what was going through your mind at that point of potential financial barriers that you saw or — whether they were real or not or maybe perceived to be greater than they were — but financial barriers that you saw that may have prevented you from taking that year off?

Nick Ornelia: There weren’t too many, honestly. I had done a really good job — I’m sure we’ll get into this, but I paid off my loans super quick. I had a nice nest egg in my 401k. I had about $50,000 saved up in my savings account. And after reading that book, “How to Travel the World on $50 a day,” you know, if you calculate that out, 365 days, that’s about $19,000 I think is about what that works out to. That’s traveling relatively cheaply. I knew I didn’t want to travel that cheaply. So that’s where that extra money came in. So I knew, even if I traveled as cheaply as I could, I knew that I would have enough money to last the year. So I was not concerned about running out of money there. I did think quite a bit about the opportunity costs, so you know, you’re going a whole year without earning any money. You’re going a whole year without contributing anything to your 401k. And if you’re looking 30-40 years down the road, that money, if you max it out at $18,500, that’s going to be a considerable amount of money that you’re potentially missing out on. So I thought of those opportunity costs, but then I thought of myself sitting there at the age of 65, you know, with all this extra money but then the thought of never having gone through with this dream of mine to take a year off work. And that was kind of ultimately one of the main reasons why I decided to do it. I was afraid of that regret. Yeah, the money would be great to have at that age, but what are you going to spend it on then? I’m young now, I have the opportunity to do this right now, to live in this moment for an entire year. And so that’s one of the main reasons why I did it. But the financial risks, I mean, probably the biggest risk I was worried about then was my ability to make money. Our biggest asset is our ability to make money. And you know, just being concerned about coming back to a job, to full-time work. But I was prepared for anything. I was prepared to find a different job just to make ends meet for the time being until I was back to full-time pharmacist work. So the financial risks, you know, I looked at them, but I tried not to worry too much about them because if you worry about every single little thing like that, you’re never going to take a leap, you’re never going to take a risk. And you’re going to kind of be stuck sitting on your hands. So eventually, I just was like, whatever. Let’s just jump in and do it. And if I’ll end up on my last dime, I’ll kind of worry about that then. But in the meantime, let’s just do this.

refinance student loans

Tim Ulbrich: I really hope, Nick, our listeners will go back and rewind and replay the last few minutes of what you said. I think there’s so much wisdom there. And you know, we talk about the x’s and o’s of personal finance, all of which are important. But at the end of the day, this reminds me back to the conversation Tim Baker and I had with Jess, my wife, and I about really finding your why and not losing sight of your passion, your interests, your purpose, in addition to the x’s and o’s. And I think it’s easy to get hung up in making sure you have your t’s crossed, your i’s dotted with your personal finances. But one of my greatest fears that I share with what I think I heard you say was looking back 30 or 40 or 50 years from now and saying, I saved up all of that for what? What was the purpose? And I think the enjoyment of life experiences is huge. And I’m so glad you took that leap of faith, and I think your story is going to encourage so many others that are maybe feeling in a rut or they’re stuck, they’re stressed and really wanting to pursue a similar path. And we’re going to get tangible here in a little bit about how they can think about doing that. But what I also want to say is I don’t want to brush over what I know you did, which is huge, is you had a solid financial foundation, which allowed this to become a reality. And so many people that are listening are thinking, wow, I’ve got $200,000 student loan debt, I’ve got credit card debt, I’ve got this going on. I’ve got young kids and expenses and I don’t have margin to do something like this. And I think what your story resonated to me, as I’m reading right now through “Rich Dad, Poor Dad,” for a second time, is he talks about the importance of having a strong financial foundation so you can take risk. Now, in his book, he’s really talking about risk from real estate, the business aspect, doing some things that are entrepreneurial, but I think taking risk of taking time off and developing yourself is another aspect of risk. So share with our listeners for a moment, how did you build that strong foundation? You paid off student loan debt in 10 months, you built up some savings, you began retirement, how is that possible? And what was the strategy of doing that in such a short period of time, which takes many other people maybe five or 10 years to get to that point?

Nick Ornelia: Yeah, sure. First of all, you just mentioned the episode about the interview of you and Jess with Tim Baker.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nick Ornelia: THat was my favorite episode by far so far, just hearing you guys talk about your whys and the questions that he was asking you just really got me thinking, and I literally, I was at the gym when I listened to that episode. And right when the episode was over, I just got out my phone and I texted my wife and I told her, “I love you.”

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome.

Nick Ornelia: So that, the stuff that you guys are doing is just fantastic in that regard. So I wanted to get that in there. But yeah, going back, my kind of financial story. I mean, really it started in high school, and I just decided to go to pharmacy school. I knew I was good at math and science, and I knew that pharmacists made a good salary, and that honestly kind of why I chose it. And so I went in knowing that I was doing pharmacy and knowing that I would have the degree after six years. And I went with the best financial package, which happened to be Ohio Northern. And so really did a good job of minimizing my debt. My parents were paramount in that. I know they helped me out quite a bit throughout my college years, and it’s something that I’ll never forget, it’s something that I plan on paying forward with my children. But I also, you know, at Ohio Northern, it’s a bit different for all the student listeners out there. Our last two years, our scholarship was based completely on our GPA from our first four years. And there were days that I buckled down, and I went and I studied and I got good grades and got a pretty good financial package for the last two years of pharmacy school. So I was able to come out of ONU with only about $35,000 in debt. I had also taken some money from Walgreens, I started as an intern there and took every single dollar that they offered as far as tuition reimbursement, which really helped minimize my debt as well. So upon graduation, I went right into work. I didn’t mess around. The day I got licensed, I went into work later that day. So I jumped right into it. I was living with my parents at the time and just continued to live with them and my sole purpose in life was to make that $35,000 in debt disappear. And I did owe my dad a little bit of money for a car so I had to pay that off as well. So I just lived at home with my parents, didn’t do much but work, picked up extra shifts and by I think it was January — I got licensed in I think June or July and then by that following January-February, I hit that final payment button. And that was the end of the student loans for me. I know it’s not as easy for a lot of listeners. And I’m forever grateful for that. That’s something that I’ll forever be grateful for. But at the same time, you know, once I paid off my loans, I still kind of kept in that saving money mindset, so as soon as I paid those off, I started my 401k contributions. And from the get-go, I maxed them out. I was throwing 15% of my salary. I started it that January right after I paid off my loans. So I had been maxing that out ever since then, ever since January of 2010. And then also, I really avoided the big purchases. I was young and dumb a little bit. I bought a 2011 Audi A5. You know, you guys call it the million-dollar car and essentially, it is a million-dollar car.

Tim Ulbrich: It might have been 2, right?

Nick Ornelia: But you know, I did that. And that was probably my biggest financial mistake leading up to my year off. I didn’t buy a house, I rented a small apartment that was easy to furnish, cheap, and all my other spending was kept in check. I wasn’t buying new gadgets, I never had credit card debt, never a penny of credit card debt. So I just saved as much money as I could and minimized my costs as much as I could. And that really helped build that financial base that you were talking about, really building the net worth. I know you guys are big net worth guys, and I was really able to do a good job of that over those four or five years leading up to when I actually decided to take a year off.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and Nick, what I appreciate about your journey there — and I hope the students listening heard that your financial foundation post-graduation starts when you’re in school. It’s the decisions you’re making. Yes, you had parental support, which is awesome, but also in there was scholarships and pursuing those types of things, being intentional about putting yourself in a position to get those scholarships. It’s about doing everything you can post-graduation to minimize accumulation of interest and keeping costs down and not buying big homes and other things. So yes, you had help. But there’s intentionality in that and all the way back to your P1 year at Ohio Northern, building that foundation and your parents helping you do that, obviously was a big factor in allowing you to do the things that you’re doing today. So let’s get to the point of, you make this decision, say, “You know what? I’m doing this. I’m taking a year off.” Walk us through that conversation with your employer. What was their receptiveness to it? What security, if any, did you have about if I take this year off, will my job be here? Take us through that conversation with your employer and what was going through your mind at that time.

Nick Ornelia: Yeah, sure. So when I decided to do it, that day that I decided in October of 2015 that I’m going through with this, no matter what, I knew I had two options. I knew I had the option of trying to figure out a leave of absence. And then the alternative option was to quit, to just walk away. And I had it in the back of my mind that even if I can’t work out this leave of absence, I’m going to do it. I’m going to quit. It’s what’s going to be required for me to do this. But I’m going to do it if that’s what it comes down to. So I had that idea in the back of my mind, that kind of promise to myself to do that. But you know, obviously, I wanted to work out a leave of absence. It’s a lot more preferable to quitting, obviously, to have at least some sort of guarantee of work to come back to in a year. It takes a big worry off your mind so you’re able to enjoy the year a little bit more. And to be able to walk back and make any kind of money to begin supporting yourself again is really important, if you can make it happen. So I started looking on the Walgreens website, on our internal website, and found the leave of absence form. And it was the same form that you use for — I think you used it for family medical leave, for personal medical leave, I think even for maternity leave. But the very last option, leave option, was just a personal unpaid leave of absence. And it was left completely blank, no discretion, no direction as what to use it for. So that was my route, so I printed that form out and I needed three different signatures on it. I needed a signature from somebody in my store, which I had my pharmacy manager Jason who happens to be one of my best friends. He was super excited for me when I told him about it, and he signed the form no problem. He was one of my biggest supporters, just an incredible guy.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome.

Nick Ornelia: Forever thankful for him. So I got his signature, and then I needed my district supervisor’s signature, which she had the same thing. She was super pumped for me and excited. And then I needed a signature from somebody in the leaves department, and I got all three of them and got approved for the leave of absence starting April 1, 2016. And then I had to be back to work by March 31 of 2017. Otherwise, I would be terminated. So I basically had this entire year to do whatever I pleased. And I was completely up front with what I wanted to do. I told them, I said, “Hey, I want to travel for a year. This is where I’m going to go, this is what I want to do. I will be back in a year. I want to work for Walgreens, I don’t want to work for anybody else. I love this company, I like my job. But this is what I want to do right now.” And so I got the necessary signatures, and I’ll never forget the day that I got the letter saying my leave of absence was approved. It was a pretty exhilarating day to know that I had this great big adventure planned ahead of me. So it was pretty awesome.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. What I like about that part of your story, Nick, is that to me, when I hear about the reaction from your pharmacy manager and your district manager and how excited they were for you, that tells me the level of value that you had brought to the organization. You know, because if you’re somebody who’s a mediocre employee or a disgruntled employee or an OK, average employee, you’re probably not getting that reaction. So I think it just speaks more to what we’ve talked about before on this podcast about as we encourage and coach people through career aspects is focus on the value that you’re providing to the organization. What value do you bring each and every day? And the rest of it will take care of itself, whether it’s opportunities, whether it’s salary increases, whether it’s things like this where you’re granted a year off and ultimately, have excitement around it as well. Now, I know you and I talked a little bit before the show and before we hit record that technically, there was no guarantee of employment upon your return. But you know, you had some indications that there was support for you in that journey. So you had some peace of mind in that aspect. Is that correct? Is that fair?

Nick Ornelia: Yes. So going back to what you said about being a good employee. That’s paramount to getting a leave of absence like this approved. Just thinking from a manager’s standpoint, I’m a pharmacy manager now. Just thinking from that standpoint of, if I had an employee, one of my best employees, come to me and say, “Hey, I want to do this for a whole year. I’m going to leave, but I will be back in a year.” I kind of know that they’re probably going to quit if I don’t approve the leave of absence. But then I think about, you know, in a year, OK, I’ll be able to have a very good, fully trained, highly competent employee back working for me and no problems. So really, it’s almost — if you’re that good of an employee, if you work your butt off and you do everything that’s asked of you, then it’s to the benefit of the company and to your boss for them to approve that leave of absence and, you know, at least get some sort of a guarantee of you coming back to work for you. Now, on the flip side, if from their perspective it was we’re approving this leave of absence, but at the same time, we don’t know where we’re going to be a year from now. So we can’t completely, fully guarantee you any kind of promises as far as number of hours per week or where you’re going to be, where you’re going to be working. But I was prepared to hit the ground running from the bottom like I did when I was a new grad. I figured I would have had to go right back in the floating and it might have just been part-time work, but anything, even just a couple days of work a week would have been enough to kind of get me back on my feet and get me going again until I eventually work my way back into a store in a full-time position. So yeah, you’re right. There was no guarantee of anything coming back. All that leave of absence did was preserve my company start date. And it preserved — or it suspended my benefits. So that way, when I came back, my benefits would resume how they were before my leave of absence. So yeah, that was kind of one of the risks that I took, but it was worth it to me. It was worth it to me to have a year to pursue my dreams and passions and have to kind of start over with my pharmacy job and pharmacy career. But that was a risk I was willing to take. It’s funny how it all worked out, though. I ended up not having to start from the bottom. So the guy who replaced me in my store, I was a staff pharmacist at the time. I’d been at the store with Jason for I think five years at that point, four or five years. And so the guy that replaced me took a manager’s position at a different store about two or three months before I was due to come back to work. And Jason convinced the district supervisors to hold my position for me at my old store until I got back in like two or three months. So I was able to go right back into the exact same store, the exact same position, full-time work. I think my first day back was March 27, 2017. It was a Monday. And I was right back standing where I was a year ago at that time. So it was quite incredible how it all worked out.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about your trip. Let’s talk about what you saw, where you went, how much money it had cost you throughout the year. And for me, maybe more importantly, what you learned about yourself during that year.

Nick Ornelia: Sure. So the money aspect, I mentioned I had about $50k saved up in a savings account. $10k of that to me was pretty untouchable. It was my emergency fund and my fund in case I needed money when I came back to keep me going and get me going again. So I had about $40k to spend for the whole year. I had mentioned that book, “Travel the World on $50 a Day,” so I knew if I traveled cheap enough, then I could keep my costs around — my living costs, my living costs, my food, my shelter, my travel, plane tickets, that kind of stuff. I knew if I kept that around that cost, that would leave me about $20,000 extra dollars to basically spend on whatever I wanted to do. So that was kind of my budgeting plan. It wasn’t much of a plan, but at least it was something. But I had limits in mind. I knew I wasn’t going to go over a certain amount. So yeah, so my first six months, I am an absolute huge fan of America’s national parks. I am just in love with them, so I had been to quite a few before then, but I wanted to try to hit as many national parks as I could and as many of these just incredible places out west. So the first six months, I spent out west. I drove all the way to California, spent a couple weeks in the Sierra Nevada mountains, which I know you and Jess are big fans of that. I climbed Mount Whitney, which is the highest mountain in the Lower 48 states. I did that as part of a charity fundraiser thing.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I remember that.

Nick Ornelia: Which was really cool to be able to raise some money for a pretty cool charity that I support. So yes, I did that and then headed over to Utah and spent like three weeks in Utah, just hiking around all the national parks there and exploring just an absolutely incredible state. And I met my buddy Tony in Colorado, spent a week in Colorado white water rafting, and then we drove home together, went to a couple Major League Baseball stadiums along the way. I went home — so I got home early June, spent a few weeks at home in June, and then at the end of June, I headed back out west. My buddy Sam accompanied me this time. We spent another week in Colorado, just hiking around the mountains, backpacking, camping. And then from there, I drove back out to California. I hiked the John Muir Trail, which is about a 220-mile trail through the Sierra Nevadas, which was two of the best weeks of my life, just the beauty of the places that I saw. Just stunning. And then from there, I headed north up into Washington and from there, I spent about three weeks in Washington. I climbed Mount Rainier, which is just one of the most beautiful mountains in the world, in my opinion. And from there, I headed east towards Wyoming. And we haven’t talked about this much, but I was dating somebody at the time. So I mentioned my relationship ended, and a couple weeks after that, I met Alanna, who is now my wife. So I met her — so we were dating at the time, and so she’d decided to fly out. She met me in Wyoming, and we spent two weeks together in Wyoming. And that was really when I knew I really liked her at the time, she was super supportive of my trip. And when she flew out to meet me and we spent those two weeks together, that was pretty much when I realized I wanted to marry her. So that was just an incredible back story of my whole year off, which we don’t need to get too much into, but from there, we drove home. After that, I flew to Europe in September. I spent two and half months in Europe, just backpacking around. My sister accompanied me for a week in Paris and London. And then I came back to Cincinnati for the holidays. And then right after Christmas, I flew to Africa. And I had signed up to do six weeks of volunteer week in Uganda. And then I went to Tanzania for three weeks, I climbed Kilimanjaro, went on safari there. Also in Uganda, I went on a safari, I went and saw the mountain gorillas, did all the fun stuff there. And then Alanna met me again in Kenya for my last two weeks of my year off. And we volunteered together, went on safari and just had an absolute blast.

Tim Ulbrich: And Nick, I’m getting chills just hearing the experiences you’ve had and thinking about obviously what relationally it did for even just building a good foundation for you and your wife now and that experience and some of the mission and service work that you did. And so I think you’ve partly answered that, but let me wrap that around about as you look back on that year, what are some of the things that you learned about yourself during that year? Because I have to imagine when you’re doing that kind of travel, you’ve got work set aside, there’s probably lots of time for reflection and growth. So what were some of your takeaways from that year?

Nick Ornelia: Sure. One of my goals was to learn as much as I could. So I read constantly. I think I read probably around 40 books throughout the course of the whole year. So you know, just learning practical day-to-day and just reading some great literature and great books. I think I learned, I learned quite a bit. A lot of it, in regards to my career, I learned quite a bit. So when I was volunteering in Uganda, I actually volunteered at a pharmacy there. It was a government-run healthcare facility. And they actually had a small pharmacy. It was a closet. It was like 6-foot by 8-foot. And they only had about 25-30 medications that they dispensed. And I was basically given the keys to the place after my second day of work. So I learned quite a bit about the differences in healthcare between a third-world country and our country. And I learned how it is so easy for us here in America to take everything for granted and the opportunities that we have and the long lives, the long, healthy lives that we live here, it’s just overwhelming to look at the differences between those two. So I learned to really appreciate my health, appreciate everything I have here at home, everything that we have here in America, the healthcare system that we have and the opportunity that we have career-wise as well as pharmacists. But there was a lot of personal things that I kind of learned and I think I improved on as well. I think I was always, you know, prior to my year off, I was always thinking ahead or I was always reliving past moments. I was never able to fully live in the moment and fully appreciate a relationship or appreciate my life the way it is. I don’t think I was ever able to just sit down and say, man, I feel like totally, completely content right now. Everything is just perfect right now. I was always thinking ahead or thinking back and worrying about this or worrying about that, and that year just kind of caused a lot of that to just evaporate. And it’s continued on now. I just notice things, just sitting down and just enjoying myself and just not needing any stimulation and not needing to have the TV on or anything like that. This might sound kind of creepy, but one of my favorite things to do is to just observe my wife. I just love just seeing her facial expressions and the way she laughs and the way she does different things. And it’s just really cool to kind of have that perspective and to be able to just slow down now and just take a deep breath and just say, man, this is exactly where I want to be in life. I don’t want to be anywhere else.

Tim Ulbrich: And to be present, I think just what you said there, again, to me, highlights how many things we miss each and every day of not being present, you know, that are right in front of us. So Nick, as I hear you talk about all of the things you did during this year, the things that you learned about yourself, the opportunities to serve, what you were able to obviously gain relationally — to me, it begs the question of do we need to rethink the concept of retirement? So I think kind of the concept that we all know, we’ve been raised in is you grind it out for 40 or 50 years, you save up a nest egg, and you hope you’re healthy enough to use it and enjoy it. And we know many stories of people that aren’t able to do that or things change or they never save it up, they keep working. Does your experience beg the question of whether or not we should rethink this concept of how we do retirement?

Nick Ornelia: I think it absolutely, most certainly does. You know, this idea of just working and working and working in hopes of this great and happy retirement, you know, I think it’s a lot more possible nowadays. We live long lives. The life expectancy is increasing, and you are able to live a good life. And there’s nothing wrong with that way of thinking. Millions, billions of people have gone about it that way and have lived very happy, fulfilling lives. So there’s absolutely nothing wrong with that. But if you’re given the opportunity to pursue something different, to maybe live life a little bit differently, I think you — when you’re able to step out of that rat race for awhile, of the busyness of everyday life and just step back and be able to think and reflect — it help you grow a greater appreciation for everything that you have. And it creates these pockets of time throughout your entire working life where you’re able to just be fully happy and just enjoy yourself and not be caught up in the rat race of life. It’s not an easy thing to do, you know. It takes pretty good financials and a bit of risk, but I think that’s kind of the wave of the future. There’s becoming more and more literature out there about that. There are countries, European countries, Australia, New Zealand, that sort of thing is actually encouraged — taking extended time off. Some countries actually even have walls that protect a worker if they do decide to leave work for a year that allows them to go right back into their same position. And I think you’re seeing more of that today now with — I know Walgreens and I know CVS just recently announced a new paternity maternity leave. We get eight weeks of paid leave whenever we have children. So I think there is a trend kind of in that direction. But yeah, if you’re able to pull it off, it’s a life-changing experience, and it’s incredible. I can’t speak more about it.

Tim Ulbrich: And that’s why I appreciate you sharing your story. I think as I’ve talked about this concept with many pharmacists, I would say most, if not all, say, “Yes. I get it. I agree,” but struggle with the tangible aspect of show me somebody who’s done it and how do I do it? So let’s there in this show as we talk about seven financial steps to take a year off. We’ll link to your blog post about this topic because I think it’s spot on. So we’ll do it in an abbreviated kind of a rapid-fire format. I’m going to pitch each of these out here so our listeners can hear all of them, and then we’ll go back through them one-by-one and hit the main highlights. So in your blog post — and we’ll link in the show notes over at your blog, which is at YPYearOff.com, you talk about seven financial steps to take a year off. Those seven are No. 1, create an emergency fund. No. 2, pay off credit card debt. No. 3, pay off student loans. No. 4, start 401k/IRA contributions. No. 5, start saving for your year off. No. 6, increase 401k/IRA contributions. And No. 7, add more money to your emergency fund, finish retirement savings and finish your year off savings. So first off, No. 1, create an emergency fund. What’s your recommendation for people here when it comes to an emergency fund?

Nick Ornelia: $10k. Quick and easy, $10k. I mean, that’s going to cover everything you need beforehand and then coming home, $10k is more than enough to last you until you get back to full-time work. So $10k is what I had.

Tim Ulbrich: No. 2, pay off your credit card debt. You know, I think probably the most common question some people may have here is how do you balance that with the student loans, which is No. 3. So what advice do you give people there?

Nick Ornelia: So the high interest stuff, get rid of the high interest stuff first. Credit card debt is going to be your highest interest stuff. So if you have any of that stuff, just get rid of it. It’s terrible. Credit cards are fine. You can earn some really nice rewards points and get some nice round-trip flights for your year off by using a credit card, but pay it off in full every month.

Tim Ulbrich: And then third, you have pay off student loans, which we’ve talked extensively about on this podcast. So let’s jump to No. 4, which is start 401k/IRA contributions, which I’m guessing many listening may struggle with this concept of I want to take a year off, I need to save some money. But I also want to be balancing and thinking about the future. So what advice do you have here in terms of people initiating retirement contributions?

Nick Ornelia: Yeah, before a year off, I think it is important to kind of get some money, a good chunk of money into a 401k or an IRA. You know, when you get it into there at a young age, you’re able to take advantage of compounding interest for a longer period of time. And it’s a nice financial cushion to have. Even though it’s pretty much untouchable, you know, it is money that’s yours. And if in the absolute worst case scenario, that you get into trouble during your year off, you have a serious injury or something and you absolutely need the money, you have that money there. Now, it should be completely untouchable in your mind. But it’s that extra financial cushion and that there’s extra years of compounding interest to keep your future financials in order as well.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. No. 5, you have start saving for your year off. What is typically — obviously dependent on where people want to go, what they want to do — but what’s a rough number that you give people in terms of how much they should be saving for a year off?

Nick Ornelia: I think $40,000 is — I mean, that’s how much I had. And I lived cheaply. I camped a lot, I stayed in hostels, I stayed in volunteer houses. But I never had to say no to anything that I wanted to do. So if I wanted to spend $1,500 on a safari in Tanzania, which I did, I had no qualms about that. I had the money to do it. Now, obviously if you can’t reach $40k, it is possible to do an entire year for less than that. You can do stuff a lot cheaper than $40,000. And the other thing is, you don’t have to be gone for a full year. You can cut it back to six months, $20,000 for six months. That would make it easier to get a leave of absence possibly. Or even cut it back even further to three months if three months is all you can get. Then maybe you only need about $10,000 or $15,000 for that three months. But $40,000 for a year will give you one heck of a year.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Nick Ornelia: You will have a great time.

Tim Ulbrich: And we’ll link in the show notes to the book you referenced earlier that talked about $50 a day. I think getting examples and things people can read will help with that. And obviously reaching out to you as well and hearing your story. No. 6 is increasing 401k/IRA contributions. We talked about that. And No. 7 is adding more money to emergency fund, finish retirement savings and finish your year off savings. What I love about your seven steps here, Nick, is 1, they’re tangible. But 2, what it does is it allows you to go off and to enjoy this year. And I think to reap all the benefits that you did with having a peace of mind that you’ve got a solid financial foundation in place. You’ve got an emergency fund, you’ve got no credit card debt, student loans hopefully are gone or minimized, you’ve begun retirement savings. You’ve got cash for this year off, so it’s really allowing somebody to enjoy that time, which goes to my last question here. And we’ll link to this in your blog as well. But you talk about the concept of calculating your year-off age, which I love because I think it takes this concept, which can maybe seem somewhat nebulous and start to become very tangible and start so that a lot of people can put a goal to say, “OK, at the age of x, I’m going to actually do this. I’m going to make this happen.” So briefly talk us through how to simply get to that calculation of what their year-off age is.

Nick Ornelia: Yeah, sure. I mean, really, all it is is kind of a net worth calculation. You’re trying to reach a goal net worth and based on how much money you make every year, you subtract out your expenses per year so you’re able to figure out, you know, an exact dollar amount of how much you’re able to save to put toward your net worth to pay off debt, to start your 401k contributions and to save for the year off. So based on what your difference, what the gap is between how much money you bring in per year and how much money is going out towards expenses, you can figure an exact age as to when you would have $40,000 for the year, when you would have a good start on retirement savings and when you would have your student loans paid off. So you can, based on that, figure out the exact age that you will be able to do it. So like you said, it does make things tangible to have an idea of what age it’s possible. And then it also opens up the avenue of figuring out ways to cut back on your expenses. And then you recalculate your year-off age, and you’re like, “Wow. If I cut out this expense, I’d be able to — my year-off age would be a year earlier than that.” So you know, it creates that timeline in your head and kind of makes it easier to adhere to your budget.

Tim Ulbrich: So make sure to our listeners, head on over to the Young Professional’s Guide to a Year Off, YPYearOff.com. Again, that’s YPYearOff.com, where you can get more information about the seven financial steps to take a year off. You can calculate your year-off age. You can follow Nick’s journey. And Nick, thank you so much for taking time to come on. You’ve inspired me. I’m confident you’re going to do that same thing for our listeners. So really appreciate you taking this step out, taking this risk, and then being willing to share your story with other pharmacists that are part of our community. Thank you so much.

Nick Ornelia: It’s been a blast, Tim. Thank you so much.

Tim Ulbrich: As we wrap up another episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, I want to thank today’s sponsor, Script Financial.

Sponsor: You’ve heard us talk before on this show about Script Financial. YFP team member, Tim Baker, who is also a fee-only Certified Financial Planner, is owner of Script Financial. Now, Script Financial comes with my highest recommendation. Jess and I use Tim Baker and his services through Script Financial and I can advocate for the planning services that he provides and value of fee-only financial planning advice. Meaning that when I pay Tim for his services, I’m paying directly for his advice, not for products or commissions that may cloud or bias the advice he is giving me. So Script Financial specifically works with pharmacy clients. So, if you are overwhelmed with student loans or maybe confused about how to invest and save for retirement, or just frustrated with the overall progress you are making on your financial plan, I would highly recommend checking out Tim and Script Financial to see whether or not his services are a good fit for you. You can get started by scheduling a free call with Tim Baker by going to scriptfinancial.com, and clicking on ‘Schedule a Free Call.’ Again, that’s scriptfinancial.com.

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

Join the YFP Community!

YFP 077: Making the Financial Transition from PharmD to Residency


Making the Financial Transition from PharmD to Resident

On episode 77 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, Tim Ulbrich, founder of Your Financial Pharmacist, interviews Dr. Michael Murphy, a 2018 PharmD graduate of THE Ohio State University College of Pharmacy and current PGY1 pharmacy practice resident in ambulatory care at Ohio State. Dr. Murphy served as the APhA-ASP National President from 2017-2018. In this episode, Dr. Murphy and Tim talk about his financial transition from student to resident, what he wishes he would have known financially during pharmacy school and how being involved in professional organizations has put him on the fast track to a successful career.

About Today’s Guest

Michael Murphy, PharmD is a PGY1 Pharmacy Resident in an Ambulatory Care Setting at The Ohio State University College of Pharmacy. Born in Columbus, Ohio, Michael attended Hilliard Davidson High School and then headed down the street to complete his undergraduate degree and attend pharmacy school at Ohio State. During his time at the College of Pharmacy, he found his passion in advocating for an enhanced educational experience for today’s student pharmacists and for the future of the profession. Michael focused on these passions through involvement in student organizations and has held several volunteer leadership positions where he served his peers and profession, including his term as the 2017-2018 American Pharmacists Association Academy of Student Pharmacists (APhA-ASP) National President. Michael is interested in pursuing a career in academia where he looks forward to training the next generation of pharmacists and advocating for the advancement of the profession.

Join APhA

Join APhA now to gain premier access to YFP facilitated webinars, financial articles, live events, resources, and consultations. Your membership will also allow you to receive exclusive discounts on YFP products and services. You can join APhA at a 20% discount by visiting www.pharmacist.com/join-now and using coupon code ‘AYFP18’. For more information about our financial resources, visit www.pharmacist.com/financial-education.

Summary

On this episode, Tim Ulbrich interviews Dr. Michael Murphy. Dr. Murphy went to Ohio State University and graduated from his undergraduate degree with no loans. He began taking loans out for his first year of pharmacy school and took out the maximum amount for four years.

Q: What would you have done differently then now that you know that borrowing the maximum amount isn’t the best option?

A: Dr. Murphy explains that he would have learned about budgeting, monitor your day-to-day spending and also shares the importance of not taking extra student loans out for vacations. After your first semester, you can figure out how much money you actually need instead of just continuing to borrow the maximum amount.

Q: What’s your strategy to make finances work well in marriage?

A: Dr. Murphy shares that communication, cutting costs where you need to, and working together to set fun goals helps are ways to help make your finances work well in a relationship.

Q: Did the indebtedness ever play a factor in deciding to continue your education/residency instead of getting a job right away?

A: Dr. Murphy said this definitely played a factor, but he has seen his mentors go through residency and be able to pay back their loans. He said that he looks at residency as an investment to move his career forward and knew that was the best choice for him.

Q: How are you deciding which repayment plan to choose?

A: Dr. Murphy says that originally he was very ambitious and chose the standard repayment plan for his loans. Now, he and his wife are working with a financial advisor to see what will make the most sense. They are going to switch to an income-based repayment plan and work on paying off other loans first. He has a goal of paying off his loans in 10 years.

Q: How did you make the decision to work with a financial planner?

A: Dr. Murphy said that he wasn’t familiar with student loan options, retirement or investments and thought that going to an expert was the best decision. They chose someone that other family members have used and they feel comfortable working with him.

Q: What tangible benefit do you feel like professional organizational involvement has played for you as a student but also in transitioning to residency?

A: Dr. Murphy said that it’s important to think about what brings value to the money that is being spent. APhA is always fighting for the future of the profession so pharmacy remains relevant and a successful provider. APhA provides resources to help you prepare and practice at the highest level. The relationships that have been formed, although intangible, provide so much value.

Q: After joining a professional organization, what advice do you have for students and new practitioners to further their involvement?

A: Dr. Murphy suggests to take a small positive risk like applying for a leadership position or starting a new project that you are interested in. If you are unsure of how to get more involvement, ask.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to Episode 077 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Excited to have a special guest on today’s show, Dr. Michael Murphy, past president of APhASP, current pharmacy resident at the Ohio State University, excited to talk with him about his transition from student to resident. And obviously, now I just officially began my new job at Ohio State. So excited to be here alongside another Buckeye who’s been a Buckeye for a long time. So Dr. Murphy, welcome to the show.

Michael Murphy: Hey, Tim. Super excited to be here. Thanks for having me on the show.

Tim Ulbrich: So I’ve only been at Ohio State, Michael, for a week. And man, the Ohio State culture and energy and that traditions and the legacy, it’s no joke. It’s a lot of fun. And you’ve been there awhile. What — nine years now?

Michael Murphy: Yeah, I’ve been there for nine years. And you know, I don’t think they can get rid of me. I love being a Buckeye, all of the opportunities that it provides to me, my career, and of course, getting to go to those football games, that’s fun too.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. I have to up my game when it comes to Buckeye gear. I’m lacking the Buckeye gear. So as I’ve gone into work over the past week and been in other people’s offices and been there for a Buckeye Friday, I’ve realized that I’ve really got to up my game in that area. So why don’t we start by just tell us a little bit about yourself, including your decision to enter pharmacy school. Why did you want to be a pharmacist in the first place? A little bit about your journey through the PharmD and then ultimately, what led you to choose and pursue the residency training and the path that you’re doing right now?

Michael Murphy: Sure. I’d be happy to. So I am Columbus, Ohio born and raised. I grew up in Hilliard, which is a suburb of Columbus. And while in high school, I started taking some science classes. I took chemistry. And I knew immediately that I loved science. Actually, this is kind of funny. I was the proud only member of the high school chemistry club.

Tim Ulbrich: Only member.

Michael Murphy: Yes. I was real popular in high school. Around the same time, I started volunteering at the Ohio State Wexner Medical Center. I had volunteered, I would take patients from their rooms to their cars when it was time for them to go home. And I just loved seeing these patients on their best day because they were finally getting to go home. So I knew in high school that I loved science, I loved health care, and I was trying to find this way that I could tie those two ideas together. And around the end of high school, my grandfather ended up passing away. And he had been a pharmacist in the Cleveland, Ohio area for about 50 years. And it’s kind of funny how I just learned more about him throughout the process of, you know, him passing away and learned more about the impact that he had made on his community and his profession. And I’ll never forget going to his funeral and seeing all these community members come out that I had never really heard about before, but he’d made a huge impact in their life as this local community pharmacist. And I knew right there that that was the profession for me. I wanted to be a pharmacist so I could make as big of a difference in my community as my grandfather had. So I knew from 16 that I was going to be this pharmacist. And I went to Ohio State with that in mind and stuck around for eight years, and here I am.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I love that story, Michael. I remember when you were in your national presidency of APhASP, talking a lot about finding your legacy and finding that place that you have in the profession. And hearing you link that back to the inspiration from your grandfather is such a cool story. And so you go into Ohio State — and for those that don’t know and while it’s changing right now, Ohio State is a 4+4 program, so you do four years of undergrad and you do four years of pharmacy school. Obviously, you mentioned that you’re in year nine with your residency. So when I hear eight years, I think, holy cow, we’re starting to think about student loans. This is obviously a financial podcast. So talk me through the financial journey. Did you have loans coming out of undergrad in a pharmacy school? And how did that transition work?

Michael Murphy: So I was really lucky in undergrad. My parents were able to help me significantly with my undergraduate tuition, so I did not have loans coming out of undergrad. But going into pharmacy school, I went through the first year of applying for the FAFSA and seeing that transition. It was pretty significant. And I immediately started to feel that burden, just knowing that this money was not mine. But I should be spending it. It was a weird transition. But now, going through pharmacy school, I took out the max that I could for those four years. And I definitely — there are some things that I wish I had done differently, now looking back. I’m glad for my experience, it was a very positive experience during the pharmacy school. But there was definitely things I could have done differently to help myself now that I’m in this financial situation that I am today.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about that for a minute because I think you brought up an important point that is very, very common that obviously the trend I think is typically to take out the maximum amount of student loans. I did, and I didn’t really think about it in the way I now reflect back on it, right? Which is just part of lessons learned. So obviously, that being one thing you might do. What advice would you have back for your P1 self, looking and saying, OK, I came out of undergrad, I’ve got no student loans thanks to the help of my parents. Now I’m entering into pharmacy school and kind of starting to escalate that indebtedness because of the borrowing the full amount. What would you have done differently in terms of borrowing that money or budgeting through that phase? And what are some things you wish that you would have known during that time?

Michael Murphy: Well, one, I would have introduced P1 Michael to the word “budget.” I think that would be one thing. I watched my money somewhat. But I wasn’t too concerned when it came to little things like going out for dinner or getting lunch, cups of coffee, the normal things that every student needs to do. And when I was thinking about some advice that I could give to a first-year student pharmacist, I would say definitely don’t do what some of my friends did, which they took their extra student loans and they went on these extravagant vacations. Never do that. But also watch your day-to-day because looking back now, that is some of the times that I spent the most money because I would say, “Oh, I’m too busy to go to the grocery store on the weekend. I have to study.” So I would end up having to go out for dinner multiple times a week and go out for lunch. And that stuff adds up quick. So watching the day-to-day can be a significant change in what you can do to help with some of this financial burden. And then after that first semester, you can figure out how much money do you really need? You probably don’t need that full amount. You can budget for yourself to make financial smart decisions now so you’re not regretting them in four years.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, absolutely. And I think a couple things there that really stand out to me, Michael. Obviously, the concept of the budgeting piece, of course. But also just the reality of the nickel-and-diming of those expenses, right? And I think we all feel this now. I mean, I’m thinking of the last time I just logged onto my Huntington checking account, and none of those charges look extravagant, but something here, something there, something there, and obviously, those add up over time. And then I hope for the students that are listening to the podcast, you know, they heard that message of reevaluating how much you really need because we’ve been preaching before on this show at anybody who will listen that when you’re borrowing money in school, obviously that is accruing interest. And then that’s going to capitalize when you graduate and you get to the point of active repayment, which you’re just coming up on now and we’ll talk about here in a minute. And so I think it’s for those that have gone through this situation, and you’re looking at yourself in a situation like Michael and somebody who has around the average indebtedness or myself, somebody who had a little bit more, that certainly you want to learn from the lessons and the actions that you took. But obviously, there’s only so much value in beating yourself up. But for those students who are listening, try to figure out what could I do differently right now? And how could I pivot to be able to make some different decisions? So let me transition this a little bit — my understanding, you got married during pharmacy school to your wife, Robin. Is that correct?

Michael Murphy: Yeah, we got married right after my P1 year. So we actually got married about four days after my first year of pharmacy school. And that was a rough transition in itself because the idea is you’re planning about a year to a year and a half before the wedding. And starting pharmacy school and that transition, things just got put off initially to winter break. And then winter break, we were like busy with holidays and seeing family, and things got put off again. And then all of a sudden, we were scrambling. But everything turned out perfectly, as it always does.

Tim Ulbrich: And one of the questions that I always like to ask any couple or anybody on the show that’s working together with somebody else — and obviously, your situation being unique that you got married during school and you’re adding somebody else’s financial picture into the mix. But for you and Robin, what works well for the two of you? I mean, when you’re hitting all cylinders with your finances and you’re doing this well — we all know that that’s not all the time or we’d be lying, right? — but when it’s working well for the two of you, what is the strategy to make that happen?

Michael Murphy: So I think the most important thing is communication. Working with your significant other to set goals that work for both of you so that you can help cut costs where you really don’t need to be spending money. So I’ll use the example of eating out. That’s an easy way to make a pretty quick transition to you just going to the grocery store, preparing ahead of time, setting yourself up for success so you’re not going out to lunch multiple times a week. But also working together on setting fun goals. So part of financial planning, at least for me, is not just about cutting back but using your extra funds in a responsible and valuable way for your own experiences. And I think that’s pretty important. So you’re not just cutting back, but you’re really using those extra funds for something that means a lot to you. So if that’s for me and Robin, that’s going out and exploring a local craft brewery or going to a local restaurant and doing the things that we love to do or taking a quick day trip or for Robin, who is a dairy farmer, going out and seeing some of her favorite cows and maybe putting in a bid at an auction for a cow.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. I remember — correct me if I’m wrong — but when you were explaining to me before you recorded of what Robin’s doing, you mentioned something like the dairy farm equivalent of like APhA from an association standpoint. Is that right?

Michael Murphy: Yeah. So she works on her parents’ dairy farm a couple days a week. But she also works for the American Guernsey Association, which is what I liken to the APhA for dairy farmers.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. I love that. So let’s talk about this transition. So you go through eight years of school, undergrad, PharmD, you come out with roughly the average indebtedness, a little bit less than that. And one of the questions I often get — and my previous job was working with students, thinking about how this financial piece plays into the career decisions that they make. And I can comfortably say I felt like it was rare five, six, seven years ago that many people were thinking about this financial piece in a significant way of impacting the decision they made on residency or no residency. But that seems to be changing a little bit as the indebtedness continues to grow. And so my question for you is did the indebtedness — obviously you decided to pursue residency — but did the indebtedness ever play a factor that you thought, eh, maybe I will or maybe I won’t do this because of that dollar amount and the debt you had, versus just going out and getting a job and starting earning an income?

Michael Murphy: Hmm. That’s a good question. I mean, it was definitely a factor. I didn’t put too much weight into it because I’ve seen so many of my mentors go through residency and take that year of investment in their future and into their careers. And they’re able to still pay off their student loans, and it’s not significantly contributing to any problems that they see in the future. But it was definitely a factor. And I guess it depends on the way that I think about residency. Some people think that, oh, you’re taking a pay cut for that year. I think of it as me paying for this experience. And for me, I want to make sure that if I’m paying the difference between what I’m making as a resident and what I would be making as a starting salaried pharmacist, that that experience is worth it for me for my growth and for a springboard for my future career. So I felt like that investment made sense for me. It doesn’t make sense for everyone, but it made sense for me and for my career goals. Now, the idea of not being able to start paying off my student loans as quickly and as hard as I would like to, that’s definitely been something that I’ve been thinking about a lot lately, especially as now I received my first notice from Nelnet, the company that is managing my student loans, saying that my first paycheck is due to them.

Tim Ulbrich: On your birthday, right? Happy birthday.

Michael Murphy: Yeah, it’s due on my birthday, which is just —

Tim Ulbrich: That’s cruel. That’s just cruel.

Michael Murphy: But I’ve seen some of my friends now that started just right off in the community, and they’re able to put more of their monthly salary to their student loans. And you know, it’s just a difference in what we’re able to contribute at this time.

Tim Ulbrich: Michael, one thing I love that you said that just hit me — and I’m going to use this as I talk to student pharmacists, and I wish I would have this mindset — is looking at the residency training year as something you’re paying for — and I love how you said basically, the difference. So if you take a pharmacist is making $100,000, just for an even number, and you’re being paid as a resident whatever, $40,000 is an even number, that you’re making that investment of essentially — one way of looking at it is saying, “I’m taking a pay cut.” The other way of looking at it is say, “I’m investing $60,000 toward this component that’s going to advance my career and the skills and the development of myself.” And I think that’s huge as a mindset shift, right? I mean, if you think of it that way, all of a sudden, it changes probably how you’re getting the most value out of that experience and from your preceptors and the mentorship and all of that. So I love that. And I hope that you’ll continue to shop that message to anybody that will listen because I think that can be such a game-changer for people to make sure they’re getting the most of that year, to look at that year as an investment. So you make this transition into residency and now, as you mentioned, here you are. Here you are in essentially November at the time of recording this, and you get that happy message that hey, grace period is up. And I always joke on the show, I feel like the grace period is anything but gracious because the interest is still accruing, but you don’t have to make payments. All of a sudden you have to make a payment, nonetheless on your birthday. How are you going about making the decision of which repayment option you’re going to choose? Because so many people get hung up, as we’ve talked about before on this podcast, making that decision. So how did you and Robin work through as you’ve had this time in the grace period to say, OK, once I go into active repayment, this is the best game plan for us?

Michael Murphy: So for me, when I initially went through exit cousneling, I was a little bit too ambitious and thought that, oh, I’m going to be making x amount of dollars per month, I will definitely be able to contribute much more than I actually can. So I picked, initially, one of the standard repayment models, which with my student loans is over $1,000 per month, which is just too significant for what I can currently pay on a resident salary. So I’m now going through the process of working with Robin and working with our financial advisor, which is one of the first things that I did once graduating. I can’t advocate that enough to students is to find a financial advisor, start getting advice early on. But working with our financial advisor to find out which repayment plan would make the most sense for me, especially this first year in residency. And we decided an income-based repayment model would be the one that makes the most sense for us because right now, we can spend some time focusing on some of our other debt, like Robin’s car loan, like Robin’s student loans that are a little bit smaller. And then we can be paying off some amount to my student loans as well. And then eventually, we will be able to bring all of these payments together and be putting our full force towards my student loans. The idea that was shared with me is this idea of a snowball that you’re slowly building up steam over time and as the snowball rolls down the hill, it builds and builds and builds, and eventually, you’re putting your full force towards this one student loan.

Tim Ulbrich: I like that. And so what I heard there is essentially, you had jumped out of the gates and said, “OK. I want to do the standard repayment, the 10-year repayment.” The reality of that, of course, is a big payment if we’re looking at let’s say $150,000-160,000 of student loans, resident salary. So then you took a step back and said, OK. For you and Robin, what are the other financial goals you’re trying to achieve, what other debts are you trying to pay off? How much income do we have in our monthly budget that we’re working with? And then obviously, that led you down the path of one of the income-driven plans. And it sounds like you’re still kind of working through which one of those. Is it PAYE? REPAYE? Is it one of the IBR plans? The old IBR? The new IBR? But I know for many — and I’m guessing this is the thought for you as well — that that is a floor, but then obviously, as time goes on, you can of course make extra payments if you decide to in the income-driven plans. Is that the thought you have?
Michael Murphy: Yeah. Unfortunately, I am still very ambitious. And I think that my biggest goal would be to have these paid off in 10 years. And I know that’s probably unrealistic, but I believe in stretch goals.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.
Michael Murphy: If you shoot for the stars, you may not get to the stars, but you’ll probably get a lot farther than you would have if you’d aimed low. So I figure I’m going to aim for 10 years, get everything paid off, and if it ends up being 12, hey, at least it’s better than 20.

Tim Ulbrich: So Michael, my prediction — just knowing you and working with other people — my prediction is it’s going to be 5 or less for you. And I think that’s why I think that’s going to happen is as I’m sure you’ve talked with other people, I know I experienced this myself, once you start catching the fire of actually seeing that snowball rolling down the hill and getting some momentum, you just get fired up about making it happen quicker, and it impacts how you make other decisions. So certainly no guarantees, but we’ll touch base and kind of follow the journey. But that’s my prediction here is 5 years or less. But I like what you said there about the timeline. So you did mention, which is interesting because not many new graduates choose to work with a financial planner or financial advisor. And I know many new grads, myself included when I graduated, struggle with evaluating the benefits of what that planner can provide versus obviously the investment in doing that and engaging that relationship. So how did you and Robin make the decision that for you, it was best to pull the trigger to invest in and purchase in terms of the value of working with a financial planner?

Michael Murphy: So for me, I mean, this is going to be showing a little bit about myself, I guess it came down to my naivete. I wasn’t too familiar with some of these different student loan options that I could choose between and also just this idea of investing in my future and in a retirement plan and trying to set up some of our investments. I’d always heard this idea that you need to start early, but that’s kind of where the advice ended. I didn’t really know where to go from there to start early. So I figured that I should probably reach out to someone that has more experience than me, just like how our patients come to us for advice on their medications, I figured I should probably go to the expert for advice on what to do to set myself up for success. So that’s the reason that Robin and I reached out to someone that had worked with members of our family before to help them plan for their finances. It was someone that we knew and trusted and we knew that we would feel comfortable with. And we reached out to them, and our first visit was very positive. They talked us through what the next six months are going to look like and what we can do to help start paying off our student loans and at the same time, start investing in our retirement and 40 years down the line and what we want our future to be. And I thought that was interesting because initially, I was just going to think about my student loans. But if we start investing now, we’re going to see significantly more benefits later on than if we waited. So I thought all of that advice was really impressive. And it gave me a lot of confidence that I made the right choice to reach out to someone for help.

Tim Ulbrich: I really appreciate your maturity for you and Robin. I feel like — as probably other new grads can relate — I felt like coming out of school at 24, and even though I had $200,000+ of debt, I felt like I liked the topic enough and want to learn about it that I’ve got this myself. And the piece I forgot and it took me awhile to realize is that so much of this, especially for new practitioners, is so complicated with all these moving pieces and parts. But also, so much of this is so behavioral that even if you have the knowledge and especially I think in a situation with a spouse to have a third party help work through a financial plan can be incredibly powerful and keep you accountable in that plan, even if you have the right knowledge. Ultimately, so much of this topic can be behavioral. And Tim Baker and Tim Church just talked about recently about the behavioral biases that come with investing. And so we have been advocating over and over again on this show about the benefits — and while it may not be for everyone — what you should look for, questions you should ask to make sure you’re working with somebody that has your best interests in mind. YourFinancialPharmacist.com/financial-planner, we’ve got lots of information that will help you hopefully find and ask the right questions to be working with somebody that we think will help you holistically and comprehensively work on your financial plan and not just focus in on one piece. And I like what you said there, Michael about obviously, it’s just much bigger than just one part, whether that be student loans, investing or any part of the plan. So finally, I want to shift gears and talk about your involvement in professional organizations because obviously, you had a very notable role as the national president of APhASP and for those that don’t know, again, correct me if I’m wrong, Michael, APhASP I believe is 22,000+ members strong. Does that sound about right?

Michael Murphy: So depending on the year, we usually hang out around 30,000 members.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. I’m underestimating. So incredible number of student members, all colleges across the country. Obviously, a very highly sought-after position. And in my opinion, the office of the president of APhASP is a reflection of really the cream of the crop of students across the country that are seeking this position. So first of all, congratulations and kudos on getting selected for that position. I know I got to see you kind of work throughout that year and had a chance to have you on campus at NeoMed and visit with our students, which I know you provided them a lot of inspiration. And so one of the first questions I want to ask you is, what tangible benefit — and I’m sure there’s more than one here — but what tangible benefits do you feel like professional organization involvement has played for you, both as a student, but also in this transition because I know I hear from many new practitioners, they struggle with the tangible benefit of the membership. And they’re purely looking at maybe the cost of joining and can’t necessarily see how that’s going to play a role in their professional development or other areas. So what did that mean for you as a student and mean for you as you’ve made this transition into residency?

Michael Murphy: So for me, now I think that is a very important question because we need to think about what brings value to the money that we’re spending. I think that’s what is so important about this podcast is thinking about what we are spending our money on and making sure that it is all of value. And one of those valuable experiences that I always know that I will spend money is my membership to APhA. And that’s because it brings value to me when I was a student, it brings value to me as a new practitioner, and it’s going to bring value to me throughout my time as a pharmacist. And that’s because APhA is constantly fighting for the future of the profession to make sure that the pharmacist will always be a relevant and accessible healthcare provider. So for me as a new practitioner, some of the tangible benefits that I have been able to get are resources. So it can be overwhelming all of a sudden going from this shift, from student where you have this safety net to the pharmacist. And it can be scary of all of a sudden thinking that, whoa, I am the last line of defense. I need to make sure that I am as skilled, confident, as possible so that I can take the best care for my patients. And I think that APhA, through their practice division, provides a great level of resources so that you can practice at the highest level of your potential. Additionally, I know that some of the resources that you can gain through attending their conferences are out of this world. I just went to the MP Day of Life for the first time in July in Washington, D.C., and I learned about this woman’s health initiative out of Indiana, and we listened to a woman’s health pharmacist and learned about some of the different resources that they use in their practice to ensure that they’re using the best oral contraceptives for their patients. And I took that resource and I use it just about every day in clinic, where I’m getting questions from different physicians, asking which oral contraceptive do I pick? There’s so many different ones with different ideas. Which one should I use? And it’s nice having this resource that I was able to get because I attended an APhA conference. And then I mean, the tangible benefits, I can go on and on. But for me, some of the greatest value is in the intangible — the relationships that I’ve been able to form with my friends going back from 5-6 years ago when I first started getting involved in APhA to the relationships that I’m forming every day with different APhA members. And one of the things that is nice about APhA is not just health systems pharmacists or community pharmacists or managed care pharmacists. It’s everyone. And you can really find different ways that you can get to know pharmacists from across the spectrum so that you can find out ways that you can help them, and they can find ways to give back and help you in your career.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s great stuff. I couldn’t agree more. And I had the opportunity to serve as our chapter advisor of APhASP at Neomed and, you know, what I always heard over and over again is there’s a hesitancy from some students to jump in. But once they jumped in, they got involved in the meetings, they attended a national meeting, maybe a mid-year meeting, they got involved in advocacy — once they saw it, you know, and it became real to them, obviously they caught fire. And that was so much fun to watch. And the follow-up question I have for you is I think we have many students and practitioners that are listening that are thinking, OK, maybe I’ve joined an organization before, but I didn’t go anywhere beyond that. And so they didn’t necessarily see the value in continuing that membership. So outside of, of course, making that initial decision to join, what advice would you have for students or new practitioners to then further get involved so they can really experience the value of their involvement?

Michael Murphy: So I think one of the best things that you can do is to take a small positive risk. And if that risk is you saying that you’re interested in running for a leadership position, let’s say one of the new practitioner network standing committee applications that are going to be due on Dec. 1. Take that small positive risk. If you want to get more involved, you can do it. Take that risk. If you’re a student pharmacist, and you’re saying that “I want to make a difference in my community,” start a new patient care project that follows your passion in your community and reach out to your chapter executive committee to find ways that you can get involved and make a difference out in the community. There are so many ways that you can get involved, but what you need to do is ask. Reach out to your local leaders or to your leaders within the new practitioner network, and find out ways that you personally can get involved. I just heard a interesting quote from one of my preceptors the other day. And I think it’s just perfect. And the quote was, “A hungry person with a closed mouth never gets fed.” So the idea is if you don’t ask for food, you’re not going to get fed. You’re not going to get fed with what you need. But if you reach out, you ask for what you need, then you will see results immediately. So reach out to your local leaders, reach out to the new practitioner network, the new practitioner advisory committee, and they can give you the resources that you need to get involved more, get that full value from your membership.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that. It reminds me of one of my favorite books I read a couple years ago called “Start” by Jon Acuff, and it’s that idea of taking that idea, taking that risk and that next step and inevitably, any time you do that, the next door opens and it keeps going from there. And I think it’s just part of that mindset that you spoke of earlier. OK, we’re going to finish up the show and have some fun. We’re going to put Dr. Murphy on the hot seat. I’m going to give four questions in a rapid-fire format. Quick question, quick answer. So first question I have for you, Dr. Murphy, the greatest opportunity you feel like we have as a profession right now here in 2018?

Michael Murphy: I think our greatest opportunity as a profession is to realize the impact that we can have out in our community. I believe that the future of pharmacy is in the community and is a mixture between the community pharmacist and an ambulatory care pharmacist, working almost as a primary care pharmacist. But we need to advocate for ourselves to our patients and our legislators so that we can make a difference in providing preventative care for our pharmacists.

Tim Ulbrich: What do you think is the greatest threat that is facing our profession right now?

Michael Murphy: The greatest threat, that is a good question. For me, I think the greatest threat is feeling content, feeling like this is as great as it can be. I always know that any situation can be better if we have an innovative stage of mind and we realize that through hard work today, we can see positive results in the future. We just need to get to work today. So I think our biggest threat is just feeling content. But I know that we can overcome that if we get to work today, and we will see results tomorrow.

Tim Ulbrich: What’s one step that those are listening can take to help advance the profession of pharmacy?

Michael Murphy: Reach out to another healthcare professional or to your patient and ask them to write a letter to their local legislator about the impact that pharmacists can make in their lives. And this will show that pharmacists don’t just make an impact, and pharmacists aren’t just fighting for themselves, but other members of the healthcare team and their patients can see the impact of pharmacist-provided care. And that will help advance pharmacy on a state level and the national level.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. My last question is I know you’re a learner. So what are you reading these days, either for fun or even to help develop yourself further?

Michael Murphy: Sure. So one of the books that I’m reading right now, and I feel like I’ve been reading this for awhile because residency sure is busy is the biography of Harvey Milk. And he was the first openly gay city legislator of a major city in San Francisco back in the ‘70s. And it’s really interesting reading about how this person fought against all the odds. He fought against all these people that were saying that he didn’t deserve to be a leader, but he knew in himself that he was a leader. And he didn’t listen to those people that were trying to tell him the type of person that he needed to be. He listened to himself. He listened to that voice inside that was saying that he should go out and make a difference in his community. So I love reading biographies because I love reading about how great people became great. And it reminds me of this idea that I once heard from one of my favorite professors — that if I read about how great people become great, maybe someday I can be great. And that’s what I strive for every day.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that, Dr. Murphy, and thank you so much for coming on the show today and for being an inspiration for me and many others as well and, of course, for your commitment to the profession of pharmacy. I really do appreciate it and think many listeners are going to get great value from today’s episode.

Michael Murphy: Thanks for having me, Tim. It was a ton of fun.

Tim Ulbrich: So before we wrap up today’s episode of the podcast, I want to again thank our sponsor, American Pharmacists Association.

Sponsor: Founded in 1852, APhA is the largest association of pharmacists in the US with more than 62,000 practicing pharmacists, pharmaceutical scientists, student pharmacists, and pharmacy technicians as member. Join APhA now to gain premier access to YFP facilitated webinars, financial articles, live events, resources, and consultations. Your membership will also allow you to receive exclusive discounts on YFP products and services. You can join APhA at a 20% discount by visiting pharmacist.com/join-now and using coupon code ‘AYFP18’. For more information about the financial resources we offer in partnership with APhA, visit www.pharmacist.com/yfp

Tim Ulbrich: And one last thing if you could do us a favor, if you like what you heard on this week’s episode, please make sure to subscribe to in iTunes or wherever you listen to your podcasts. Also, make sure to head on over to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/ where you will find a wide array of resources designed specifically for you, the pharmacy professional, to help you on the path towards achieving financial freedom. Have a great rest of your week!

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

Join the YFP Community!

YFP 075: DIY, Robo or Hire a Planner?


 

DIY, Robo or Hire a Planner?

On episode 75 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, Tim Ulbrich, found of YFP, and Tim Baker, YFP team member and owner of Script Financial, continue YFP’s month-long series on investing by talking about the pros and cons of a DIY approach to investing compared to utilizing a robo advisor or hiring a financial planner.

Summary

On this episode, Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker dive into a discussion of three strategies of investing: DIY, robo and hiring a financial planner. The DIY (do it yourself) route of investing means that you, instead of your employer or planner, will be in charge of all aspects of your retirement or investment. You’ll determine how much to defer into retirement accounts, what to invest in, make adjustments, and figure out to how to distribute funds at retirement, among other tasks. This route is becoming more popular most likely due to the fact that there are resources available and many advisors require their clients to have a lot of money to work with them. Pros of the DIY strategy are that there is a potential savings (if you are doing it well, etc.) and a feeling of empowerment. Cons are that there is a lack of accountability, that someone isn’t there checking or bringing awareness to potential financial behavioral biases you may have, and if you aren’t well-versed in the information, you could end up paying more.

Using an advisor is a strategy that lies between the DIY and financial planner routes. With this strategy, technology is used which allows you to simply click a link, answer a few questions, and fund taxable accounts. The pros of this strategy are that you don’t have to go through thousands of funds, the funds are automatically rebalanced over time, and the cost lands between .25-.5% on what’s invested. Cons are that there is no human interaction and that this only focuses on one part of your financial plan.

Hiring a planner means working with someone to act as the middle point between you and your investments. Pros to this strategy are the human aspect, the potential of having a comprehensive financial plan, the ability to create a diversified portfolio, and having someone act as a safeguard between you and your investments. Cons of hiring a financial planner are that the industry is structured so many planners are incentivized to grow your assets, may have a conflict of interest due to making more money off of your investments, and that a planner may not help you with credit card or student loan debt.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to Episode 075, excited to be here alongside Tim Baker as we continue our month-long series on investing. We’re nearing the end. We’ve got next week coming up, we’re going to do an investing Q&A. But first and foremost, happy Thanksgiving, Tim Baker, to you and to the YFP community. So excited to be here.

Tim Baker: Yeah, happy Thanksgiving, Tim, to you and yours. And excited to get this episode going.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, we hope everyone’s having a great day, enjoying with family. We hope that you’re not nerding out on personal finance podcasts while you should be spending quality time with family. But if you are listening, please know that we appreciate it and that we’re certainly grateful for the community that has developed here over the past year. So we’ve been going along this month on investing. We’ve covered a lot of different topics and information, everything from behavioral aspects to investing, prioritization of investing, what to look for in your different investment accounts, the fees and so forth. And next week, we’re going to wrap it up with an investing Q&A. But here, we’re talking about the strategy of investing. Is this something you do yourself? Is this something you look at engaging with a robo advisor? We’ll talk about what that means. Or is this something you look at hiring a financial planner? Maybe for many people listening, there may be a different answer depending on the status of what you’re working on and what your preference is. So we’re going to reference some previous episodes throughout this episode, so let me throw them out here in advance. Episodes 015, 016 and 017, we talked at length, Tim Baker and I did, about what to look for in a financial planner, the benefits, different types of planners that are out there. In 054, we talked about why fee-only financial planning matters. And in 055, we talked about why you should care about how a financial planner charges. All of that feeds into the conversation here about DIY, robo or hiring a financial planner. So in terms of the structure and format of what we’re going to do, with each of these three buckets, we’re going to talk about what we’re referring to in a DIY approach, in a robo approach, in a financial planner approach. We’ll talk about the pros and potential pitfalls of each of those approaches. So Tim Baker, DIY. When we say DIY as it relates to investing, what exactly are we talking about? Whether listeners are thinking about maybe their 401k or maybe their 403b at their work environment, in the TSP, or they’re thinking about an IRA that’s outside of their work?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the DIY, the Do It Yourself approach when it comes to investing, when we’re discussing things like the 401k, the 403b, the TSP, this is a little bit set up on a T-ball stand for you because the employer is essentially putting it in front of you and saying, hey, now that you work for us, we have contracted through an organization like a Vanguard or a Fidelity to basically have this investment account for you. So we’re going to cut you a deal, as long as you put money into it, we’ll match it. And we’re going to help you grow your retirement. So you can DIY that. And essentially, it’s a sandbox approach because you’re going to put in front of you a series of 10, 15, 20 — depending on the plan — investments that say, hey, for large cap, for U.S. large cap, you’re going to have four or five funds to pick from. From international, you might have two or three funds to pick from. From a bond, you might have some, it could be target funds. And if you’re hearing me talk about this and you’re saying, ‘What the heck is this guy talking about?’ then maybe having some help and not DIY-ing that — won’t be for you. Because the plan is defined, you’ll have basically a sandbox to work in. And essentially, what you’ll do is you’ll determine how much to defer into your retirement accounts. We’re talking your 401k, your Roth 401k, your 403b, what to actually invest it in — so a lot of people sometimes, they miss that step. So they think that once they put the money in there, it’s automatically invested. And some plans will be like that. But some plans won’t.

Tim Ulbrich: And they find out it’s just sitting there in a market fund.

Tim Baker: Right. I’ve seen that happen quite a bit. So you basically figure out how much you want to defer, what you’re going to invest it in, and over time, you have to kind of make those adjustments and do the rebalancing and things like that. And then when you go to retire, then you basically say, ‘Self, how do I distribute this in the most tax-efficient manner as possible?’ Whereas Tim, I don’t know about your dad, but my dad — well, my parents, really, they worked for the same company for 40 years, and the companies did that for them. And the pension manager would do that for them, basically would manage all those steps. So now, it’s kind of on us to figure that out. So that’s kind of the retirement side. If we’re talking outside the retirement, and we’re looking at IRAs, Individual Retirement Accounts, could be 529s, could be taxable accounts, that’s really where we’re going out into the market, essentially, and we’re looking at TD America, Vanguard, Fidelity, we’re going onto their website because we’ve heard of these companies, and we’re saying, ‘I want to open up an account on my own and basically do some investing on my own.’ So this is where you would open up a taxable account, open up a Roth IRA, and then the process is very similar except it’s just outside of the realm of what your employer is. So you’re opening up that account, you’re funding money from your paycheck. In then in that world, you’re essentially looking at a vast ocean, thousands and thousands of stocks and bonds and mutual funds and exchange traded funds, all the different things that could fit in these accounts. And you’re doing it in a way that hopefully is consistent with your beliefs about investing, if you have any, your risk tolerance, how you want to maximize or minimize, really, expenses and that type of thing. So I can tell from personal experience just the first time I ever opened up a Roth, I was at West Point. And I wanted to just dip my toe in the market. And I wanted to feel the feeling of basically buying a stock in a company.

Tim Ulbrich: Been there.

Tim Baker: And I think I bought like one share of Johnson & Johnson, and like after the transaction grew — and it’s kind of not very exciting — it was kind of exciting to see it, but I bought one share, which is the most inefficient way to do it because one share at that time was probably like $45. But then I paid like $10 —

Tim Ulbrich: The fee, yeah.

Tim Baker: Just to do the trade-in. But it was cool because at that time, I was like, well, technically, I’m part owner of this company, a .0 — add so many zeroes — 1% of Johnson & Johnson, so I would get documents that say, ‘Hey, these are when the board meetings are,’ but I really didn’t know what I was doing. And quite frankly — I know, Tim, we talked about this before — I probably had no business doing that, opening up an account like that because I didn’t really have a proper emergency fund. In the Army, a student is a little bit different, but there were so many other things that foundationally, I should have done before I even got to that point, but that’s kind of in a nutshell what the DIY approach is.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s — for many of our listeners, they’re probably thinking about, OK, most of my investing — maybe not all — but most of my investing’s happening with my employer-sponsored plan, so 401k, 403b. Of course that’s not everyone listening, many people have Roth IRAs or have taxable accounts that are out there, but what I’ve seen, Tim, is depending on the employer, how complex that is or is not can be all over the place. So for example, I work for the state. And they intentionally simplify options, you know, you’ve got two options in large cap, two options in international, they’re all index funds. Fees are pretty low. And I think they’re really trying to minimize some of the behavioral components that are there. But it’s still up to me, if I were doing a DIY approach and saying, OK, this is my asset allocation, this much stock, this much bonds, this much cash or cash equivalent or REETs or whatever. And then within there, what types of stocks I want to be investing in and then am I going to rebalance or not. Now, for other people — like a target fund I’m thinking of specifically — if somebody were to choose a target fund to say, OK, I’m going to retired in the year 2075, and that’s going to then set my asset allocation. The rebalancing is kind of happening along the way.

Tim Baker: It’s automatic.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: I would say from a target fund perspective, if you literally listen to what I just said about different types of funds like bond and international, emerging markets, small cap, large cap, and you’re like, ‘I have no idea,’ then go target fund. You probably will pay some type of premium for that service of it being rebalanced and becoming basically more aggressive to more conservative over time. But more often than not, I would rather you just pay the premium than have it sit in cash or be way too aggressive than you need be, depending on where you’re at in your life. But oftentimes, when I work with clients — and this is the opposite end of the spectrum, which is not DIY, it’s working with an advisor — I crack that nut, and I say, “Hey, client, you have 15-20 different options out there. And you’re in a target fund right now by default. I think we can do a little bit better given your situation and save on expense and things and break it out that way.” I think one of the things that you talk about (inaudible) and I’ve read a few books about the more choice that we are given, the more it causes that paralysis by analysis. And they say even like things like auto-enrolls. So we’ve talked about auto-enroll. There’s a lot of people that before auto-enroll really became a thing would work for a company for five, six, seven years, a decade, and never opt into their benefit of a 401k and the match there. Now, and this could be something the Obama administration put in, is that they’re incentivizing companies to basically auto-enroll employees. And then you essentially opt out of it if you want. And they’ve done a lot of studies in this with like Sweden and Finland, you have to opt out to not be an organ donor. And two countries that are very similar in a lot of ways, the opt-in, the percentage of people that were actually donating their organs was very low versus the opt-out. So a lot of this plays in. And we could do a whole topic, a whole episode, on behavioral finance and all the different biases that are out there. And I think that’s one of the things that maybe working with an advisor does. But it can be really confusing when you do it on DIY. It’s not impossible, obviously. But I think ultimately, my opinion — again, I’m biased because I do this for a living — is that I think it’s always good to have an objective look at your finances and say, hey, does this make sense? Is what I’m doing OK because I heard Uncle Tommy say this or my neighbor down the street said that, and I really want to know like sanity check this.

Tim Ulbrich: So obviously, as we think about the DIY approach, I think it’s fair to say that it’s becoming more popular — maybe not more popular but why is it popular in some regards. Accessing information is more readily available than it’s ever been before.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: Resources are out there. Just today, we had somebody ask in the YFP Facebook group, you know, I’ve heard of back door Roth IRAs, but what do I actually do mechanically. And we were able to quickly reference an article, get her a stepwise approach. So that information is there, readily available. I think that’s one of the reasons that it’s quite popular. What else do you think in terms of why people are going kind of that route of more of a DIY?

Tim Baker: I think it’s a little bit of an indictment of kind of my professional brethren. You know, there’s a lot of advisors out there that will say, “Hey, love to help you. But you have to have a half a million dollars before I can actually do work with you.” And the reason they do that is because they’ll charge based on assets, investable assets, which basically mean the assets they control directly, not what’s in your retirement account. So they say, “Hey, love to help you, but I can’t because I won’t essentially be paid enough.” So you have those minimum assets under management, AUM, requirements that basically for a lot of young population, just excludes them in general. I think one of the things that — and I was a little naive, no, I was a lot of naive to that is when I was looking at the profession of personal finance, kind of the whole 1% Occupy Wall Street was going on. So I think there is a distrust of large banking institutions and really financial advisors in general. And I think in a lot of ways, it’s well deserved. What a lot of people don’t know is that the majority, the overwhelming majority of financial advisors can legally put their own interests ahead of their clients, which when I kind of figured that out — and I was in that model when I discovered that the fee-based where you can earn commission fees, that blew me away. And it shouldn’t be that way. And I’m not saying that means 95% of the professionals out there are corrupted. But to me, is it should always be about the client, always be about what is in the best interests of the client, not necessarily mine. So I think that that perception is prevailing in a lot of ways. And that’s why I’m kind of fortunate when you talk about the work that we’re doing with you and Jess, it legitimizes, I think, what I’m trying to do. And I think what the fee-only world is trying to do is really say, there are services for young people that you’re not excluded. And by the way, I want to be on your team. And I want to get you to those goals that we talked about that whether it’s orca whales (?) or being able to retire at a certain time or whatever that is, that stuff jacks me up. And really, it’s the mechanisms of what the investments are and are properly insured that are just that supporting detail that I more or less have a playbook in my mind, and we just kind of plug and play depending on your situation.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think I can say as somebody who went the DIY route for 10 years, you know, after graduation and obviously in working with you and Jess and I, I think too it’s fair to say for many listening, there’s just that overwhelming transition that happens where you’ve got new career, you’ve got tons of student loan debt, you feel like you’re trying to develop budgets and take care of all these other things. And part of it I think is just that feeling of being overwhelmed and my budget’s tight, I’m trying to figure out these things, and I may see additional fees or things and not necessarily be able to articulate the benefits associated with those.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think it’s important that we just claim right off the bat what you just articulated nicely. Anytime we’re talking here about working with a planner versus not, you have to look at that under the assumption that it’s somebody who is good, who is acting ethically, who is acting, in our opinion, within a fiduciary standard because at the end of the day — we’ll get to some of the pros and cons of working with a planner — if you’re paying to work with a planner and you’re getting crappy advice, and you’re paying more in fees and things, now we’ve just put ourself up a creek and you might as well have gone the DIY route.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I would say this — and I usually say this when I speak is I think one of the differences between financial planning, financial advisors and the profession of pharmacy is that the profession of pharmacy is actually a profession. You can take a test and be a financial advisor and give advice. You can do exactly what I do. The barrier to entry is very, very low, which means that you have — and you can see this maybe in other professions, not to call any out, but maybe like real estate and things like that where you take a test and you can sell houses.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: Sorry to all the real estate agents out there. But when you have such low barriers of entry, that basically muddies the water for a lot of hopefully professionals. And what I point to is someone that has the CFP mark, the Certified Financial Planning marks, and that are kind of following standards of ethics and all that kind of stuff. So I think that’s another reason why there’s lots of advisors out there that don’t necessarily know either what they’re doing or the other thing could be ignorance. So again, like when I was in the broker dealer world, I just didn’t know what I didn’t know. I thought I was awesome because I wasn’t selling proprietary products for maybe some of the bigger banks. So I’m like, oh, we can pick whatever products that we want from anywhere, whatever best suits you. But then I found out that there are other advisors out there that they’re not compensated based on product sales. It’s basically — the product and the advice is separated. And you know this in pharmacy, like anytime you mix the sale of product with advice, there’s conflict of interest. And you might see it with doctors and how they prescribe medications, those types of things. So to me, the model is broken from Jump Street that really, the consumer or client needs to be put first and everything else will fall into place. But I think that would, again, lead to why DIY is a popular — you know, just the savings cost and really, there are people that are thirsty. We’ve seen that from YFP. There’s people that are thirsty to learn. And it’s just something that is a huge void in our education system. We teach how to bake cakes and make ash trays in school, but we don’t teach them how to balance a checkbook or what credit card debt looks like or what student debt looks like.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Tim Baker: So there’s a big void there, and I think people are — sometimes, we learn through pain and what we’ve gone through. And I think we can fill up a whole book of what we’ve personally done. And sometimes, it’s wisdom where we’re actually sitting down, writing through, reading “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” looking at all of the stuff that we have. You could learn a wealth of stuff on NerdWallet and Investopedia. So really, I think that’s a play as well.

Tim Ulrich: You know, one of the things I think is interesting as you were talking is — without getting too political here — when all the movement was going toward the fiduciary standard, I think it brought the public awareness and attention up a little bit that there’s not — most advisors are not acting in a fiduciary standard. And now that that really hasn’t moved forward, that may even, in some regards, lead people to think, well, now I know more about what fiduciary means, and I see that a majority of people aren’t that. That standard’s not progressing, so maybe a DIY route is where I’m going to go.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and really what Tim’s talking about here is in the last administration, basically the Department of Labor was essentially trying to push forward this standard, this fiduciary standard that said that basically the only accounts that they could touch under the Department of Labor were those basically issued by the employers. So they were saying any retirement account, 401k’s, 403b’s, and even I think IRAs, in this sense, have to be basically managed by fiduciaries that have the client’s best interests in mind. When the new administration came in, that legislation that was kind of being pushed through was squashed. So it did bring up I think some awareness that what is a fiduciary? And why aren’t all advisors fiduciaries? And there was a big push from the broker dealer world that says, hey, if we put this standard in place, then it’s going to shut out a lot of advice to kind of middle market and smaller — it’s going to shut out advice from that, which is categorically false. But it’s really around the protection of the income streams that insurance and other commissionable products generate. So I think we’ll eventually get there. It’s funny because we — I’m at different conferences, and Australia, you know, I’ve talked to advisors there that are like way ahead of us. They can’t believe that we don’t have a fiduciary standard across the board. Even their insurance products are similar. So I think we’ll eventually get there, but it could be a generation away just because of the lobbying.

Tim Ulbrich: So I think the pros of the DIY approach are obvious: potential cost savings with an asterisk — we’ll come back to that. Of course, it’s assuming that you’re doing it well and you’re controlling fees and you’re making the right decisions and so forth, you’re not being overtaken by some of the behavioral problems that can come up. Obviously, I think there’s a pro of empowerment and learning and being involved when you’ve got to figure it out, what does rebalancing mean? What does asset allocation mean? What do these funds and accounts means? So there’s a forced hand in learning. In terms of potential pitfalls, let me read you a quote from one of my favorite books, “Simple Wealth, Inevitable Wealth” by Nick Murray and get your reaction on this. He says that, “The twin premises of all do-it-yourself appeals are that most investors are smart enough, rational enough and disciplined enough always to select and maintain portfolios that are best suited to their long-term goals and that most advisors are venal and are stupid or at the very least, cost much more than they’re worth. The former premise is a fundamental misreading of basic human nature. The latter is just a self-serving mean-spirited lie.” Strong language, right? I mean, what are your thoughts?

Tim Baker: Strong language in a lot of ways. First, I had to actually look at what venal meant. So which, for you advisors out there, because I use the word fungible and gotten called on that. So venal means “showing or motivated by susceptibility to bribery.” So I think basically to summarize the quote, it’s we are perfect investors all the time. We know exactly what we need to do. We’re not emotional when it comes to this. And that advisors are stupid and basically fickle to wherever the money flows. I think that there’s probably truth and lies in both parts of that. What behavioral finance tells us and what’s becoming more and more is that a lot of our thoughts about finance is that people will — and it’s based on conventional economics — is that people will behave rationally, predictably and that emotions don’t influence people when they’re making economic choices, which is completely false.

Tim Ulbrich: We all know that. We’ve been thinking about it, right?

Tim Baker: We can outline a variety of biases, whether it’s anchoring or mental accounting or overconfidence, gambler’s fallacy, and we could maybe do a whole episode just on that. But frankly, as humans — and I do this for a living — and even sometimes for me, and especially when I’m looking at my own, we suck at it. Right now, we’re kind of in a market downturn. And I preach the long-term, I preach that over the course of the long haul, the market will take care of you. And that is a certainty. And I always joke outside of the zombie apocalypse or the Poles switching, the market will return 7-10%. It’s done it for 100 years. There’s bumps and bruises along the way, but when you’re in that moment, what I say in investing is that you should do the opposite of how you feel. So when 2008-2009 came around and we kind of are feeling a little bit of that now, you want to take your proverbial investment ball and go home. You want to get out of the market, you want to sit on the sidelines and stay in cash.

Tim Ulbrich: It should be game on, right?

Tim Baker: Right. And really, it should be opposite. If you are sitting on cash and the market is down, you should be chucking cash into your investments because essentially, it’s the one area of our financial life where we’re like, ah, I can’t believe that things are on sale and I want to get out of it. And then we kind of talked a little bit about the second part about advisors being venal and stupid. And again, I think part of that is earned in a lot of ways. But I would say by and large, I definitely operate that I think people are inherently good. But that doesn’t necessarily mean they’re good at their jobs or that they’re going to guide you the right way with regard to investing. And that’s why I think questions about that when you are potentially talking to a financial advisor is important, you know? And I think if people — one of the questions I ask prospective clients is if you had to make a list of all the things that you want your financial planner to have, what would that be? And the first one’s like, I want them to be trustworthy and I want them to communicate and I have access. But part of it is it could be an investment philosophy. If they tell me, I want someone to pick me the hot stocks, disqualified. I’m not your guy. I never will be your guy because I think the smartest thing I’ve ever said about investing in the stock market is that I don’t know where the stock market’s going to go. Nobody does. So again, I think that you shouldn’t be hiring a financial advisor to try to beat the market. By and large, they can’t do it. It should really be about managing the expectation, the behaviors, and specifically around this topic of investing.

Tim Ulbrich: I think one of the biggest pitfalls I see here — potential pitfalls — of the DIY approach is that lack of accountability, that risk of operating on an island. I know as I look back now on doing it myself, you may not feel it in the moment, but when there’s not somebody there to keep you in check and to call out the behavioral biases that we all are prone to, one I know for me and I’ve referred to before on the podcast is I knew that I shouldn’t be rebalancing more than I need to. I knew that once I set up my asset allocation based on risk tolerance, I should hold true. But you know, you log into your account, you see what’s going on, you start looking at things, and you say, well, maybe not so much of this or that, and you start messing around. And that’s why you hear the different studies saying the average return of the market is this, but the average person gets x, which is much less, because of our tendency to make those tweaks along the way. So I think accountability. I think the other thing too is that if you don’t have the right knowledge and so forth that you may end up paying more than the fees that are associated with a robo-planner, right? So we’ll link in the show notes, we wrote an article on the impact of fees and how fees can be a $1 million+ mistake alone if you’re not accounting for fees. And I know you helped me with a 403b account. I mean, we discovered fees north of — what? 1.5% I think?

Tim Baker: Yeah. And to kind of break this down, like one of the main suspects here is what’s called the expense ratio. So the funds that you are invested in, you know, mutual funds, exchange traded funds — not necessarily stocks — but the funds, there’s a manager that sits on top of that account and basically is buying and trading. And they pay themselves and they pay for office space and analysts and information. So basically, expense ratio is siphoning off money to keep the business profitable, in a sense. And if you have $100,000 in an investment and you have a 1% expense ratio, essentially you have $1,000 that is just evaporating every year from — and it’s not a line item anywhere, it’s just basically accounted for in the performance. And it doesn’t have to be that way because you can build a very investment portfolio for a tenth or even a twentieth of that. And my mantra’s always been, if I’m not getting the performance or it’s not safer for the same amount of performance, why am I paying 10 times, 20 times more? And that’s why we’re big proponents of some of the funds out there like Vanguard and Fidelity, they just rolled out a 0% expense ratio, and State Street and some of these ones that are very efficient for clients because again, you know, I think we’ve talked about this in a past episode is that the best indicator of performance is not star system ratings for Morningstar, it’s how you can drive expense down and keep as many hands in your investment — as many hands out of your investment pockets as — there’s platform fees and trading costs and expense ratios. Those are all things that — I mean, we have enough problems with the taxes and inflation that we need to be really protecting our gains, and a lot of that’s really keeping our expenses low when it comes to the investing part of the financial plan.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, if we’re going to hustle to put away money each and every month, like we’ve got to most out of it, right? And I think I love that’s what your mantra is keep those fees low. Obviously looking for performance as well, but I think of the statements I receive, and it has the tendency to say, well, I’m going to look at the one-year, three-year, five-year, 10-year performance. But I’m not really going to calculate what’s this 1% in total fees cost me? Or this 2%.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Well even that, like even advisors fall into this. They’ll say, hey, like I want to put my clients in 4- or 5-rated, and I only look at that. But that’s not the way to do it because typically, it’s a reversion to the mean. So what were high performing in 5-star systems, usually the script is flipped — pun intended — and those high performing, we’re buying them high and then they basically go low in terms of performance. So again, it’s just one that’s kind of the availability bias or what’s recently happened is we play on that. And it typically is the wrong move.

Tim Ulbrich: So that’s the DIY bucket. Let’s jump into the robo bucket. And you know, obvious pros and potential pitfalls. But here, we’re talking about somebody that maybe just heard this whole conversation about asset allocation and rebalancing and choosing investments and so forth and says, it would be nice to have a little bit of help around this investing piece there. And that’s really where robos come in. And obviously, there’s been I think — not a resurgence, a surgence of robo-advising, obviously, as they become more popular. I think they’ve been marketed a lot more than they were worth three or five years ago. So just briefly, what is a robo-advisor? Before we talk about the pros and cons.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I would categorize a robo-advisor would basically sit in between DIY approach and working with a financial advisor. So typically, when you go the DIY route — and maybe we’ll put this link in the show notes, but NerdWallet has an article that says, “Best Robo-Advisors 2018 topics.” And the typical players in this are WealthFront, Betterment and those types. And essentially, what they do is they’re market disruptors in a sense that — and I remember working at my last firm, it took 38 pages to open up a Roth IRA. And essentially, what they do is you go to their website and you say, hey, if you want to open up — these are typically the kind of self-directed accounts. They’d be IRAs, Roth IRAs, taxable accounts. If you want to open up one of these, click this link, answer a few questions, and they automatically slot — and then fund it, so connect to your bank account or fund it from a different source. And you’re in a model.

Tim Ulbrich: Automatic selection there.

Tim Baker: Yeah, everything. So it’s really a method to bring technology and efficiency in a profession that needs it. So if you’re thinking, hey, I don’t want to wade through thousands and thousands of stocks and bonds and mutual funds and ETFs, and I want something that if I ask a few questions, they’ll automatically slot and rebalance over time — some of these rebalance. They’re robo, so they look at algorithms and they could rebalance daily, weekly, and you really just want to leave it alone. Then this would be typically something that you would do. Now, again, it’s going to cost you a fee to do that. So the typical ones, you’re looking anywhere from 25-50 basis points, so .25% on what you have invested to .5%. If we measure that against most advisors are probably 1%, north of 1%, just to kind of give you some perspective. But typically, you don’t have any type of human interaction. It’s go through this questionnaire, fund it, and then those dollars are invested on your behalf per an algorithm that is rebalancing over time. So again, like I’ve said this before is — and you kind of see this sometimes in pharmacy too where you’ll say, hey, I’ll never be replaced. The technology will never replace me. But robots are actually more efficient basically rebalancing than I would ever be because I’m not sitting by my computer every day. Just like you could make a case that robots are probably going to be more efficient filling scripts because of just the advances in technology. I think what robots will never be better at than me is that kind of one-on-one personal looking at the breadth of the financial picture. And I think the same is true when we’re talking about adherence and working with patients and all that kind of stuff. So they’re very synonymous in a lot of ways. But yeah, so I think the robo, I think it’s a good thing in terms of moving the needle in the market.

Tim Ulbrich: So you obviously mentioned the pro of convenience and access disrupted what was a very cumbersome, comprehensive process. I mean now, if you log onto one of those platforms you mentioned, it’s quick, it’s easy, asks you some question, you fund the account that you’re working on, and it sets up the asset allocation for you. And boom, you’re ready to go. So lower fees than a planner. So you mentioned, obviously, we’re assuming 0 or 1%ish. So here, we’re maybe .25-.5% so you can get a feel for that. I think the con you mentioned is a really good one. The lack of human element, engagement. And I think along that line, the thing I think about as the central pitfall here is that it’s focused on one part of the financial plan. You’ve been preaching since Day 1, and many of the financial planners that are out there are focused on one part of a financial plan. But what we’ve been preaching, especially for most of our audience, is that a financial plan runs all the way from debt to death. So we’re thinking about student loans, we’re thinking about budgeting and goal-setting and the right insurance. We’re thinking about end-of-life planning and home buying and kids’ college, all of these things. And when you’re looking at your month-to-month budget and your goals and what you’re trying to do, investing is one part, albeit a very important part, but it’s one part of your financial plan. And Betterment isn’t going to jump out and say, “Hey, by the way, are you thinking about your student loans and this or that?”

Tim Baker: Right.

refinance student loans

Tim Ulbrich: And I was thinking back to just our relationship over the last year of you working with Jess and I, we’re a year in. And we’ve done very little discussion yet — we’re going to get there more — but very little discussions on investing because we’ve been spending all this time on for us figuring out what’s our why and what’s our purpose, which we published in episodes 031 and 032, maybe 032 and 033. We’ll get that right in the show notes. We’ve been talking about goal-setting, we’ve set up sinking funds and budgets and making sure we have a good foundation and insurance. And now, we’re working on end-of-life estate planning. And so I think the biggest risk I see here is that — are you filling in all the holes? And are you prioritizing goals the right way if you’re only focused on that one part of the plan?

Tim Baker: Yeah, and this is something — full disclosure — that we have been offering, Script Financial, that we’re testing out. And essentially what I want to do is be able to for someone that doesn’t want to work with me directly, they can tap into a lot of the models and portfolios that I use for clients and it’s just a little bit of less service but less cost as well. And I think if you’re not in that, then you’re going to become extinct. So I think — and we’ll put a link to that in the show notes as well. If you are wanting to do more in the investment world, open an IRA or a taxable account, make sure you’re doing all the other things we’re preaching about and have those in place in terms of foundational. But then, you know, if you’re looking at just the wealth of funds out there and you have no idea where to start, we can definitely do that as well.

Tim Ulbrich: So two out of three buckets we’ve covered. We talked DIY, we talked robo, and now let’s move into hiring a financial planner. And as I mentioned in the beginning of the show, we have previous content on this that we’re going to talk about and build on a little bit. But make sure you check out episodes 015-017 that we talk through, episode 054 about what it means to be fee-only and episode 055 about why you should care how a planner charges. And before we get into the details here, I want to reference our site, YourFinancialPharmacist.com/financial-planner. Again, YourFinancialPharmacist.com/financial-planner. We’ve got lots of content in there, we’ve got a free guide about what we think you should look for in a financial planner, who may benefit most from one. And then we’ve got an extensive list of questions that we think you should be asking to make sure you’ve got somebody who’s really acting in your best interest as you’re going along the way. So whether that’s with us or somebody else, we want you to make sure that you have the right person that’s in your corner. So Tim Baker, as I was looking at some data on this, there’s a 2016 Northwestern Mutual study that only 21% of Americans hire a financial planner to assist them, despite more than 70% — and that 70% number coming from a Harris poll — indicating that they’re interested in receiving guidance. So we have a majority that says, I want it and I want guidance, but only about a fifth that are actually engaging with a planner. I mean, maybe we’ve already hit on some of this already earlier in the show, but what’s behind that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, and it could be a lot of the things that we’re talking about is sometimes I hear a lot with prospective clients is I didn’t even really know that there were people out there that focus more on younger professionals because they look at their parents’ planner and it’s kind of where their planner is patting them on the head and saying, hey, when you have some money, sonny, I’ll help you. Or I hear like a lot of these paternalistic, where it’s like “Do as I say,” you know, it’s not necessarily collaborative, which I like. But yeah, that’s shocking is that again, I think there was people, young Americans that want it but that it’s not hitting. And I think, again, I think that’s why — you know, I’m a member of the XY Planning Network, and I think when I joined the network — so it’s a group of fee-only fiduciaries, CFPs, that really want to bring financial planning to Gen X, Gen Y demographic that’s been by and large ignored. And I joined at the end of 2015, there was 200 members maybe. And there’s 700 with us now. I mean, that’s unbelievable growth. So I think it’s just there’s a void that I think is starting to be filled. And I’m encouraged by I think what I’m seeing in the industry. But I’m also discouraged by the fact that there are a lot of people out there that need help and have no idea where to go, whether it’s account minimums or — and sometimes, it’s like well my parents never had an advisor. Sometimes with money, we kind of repeat — you know, I have a lot of pharmacists say, “I’m the first person to go to college. Further, I’m the first person to get an advanced degree. The amount of money I’m making now is more than both of my parents combined.” And what often happens is that a lot of what they’ve learned about money comes from parents, and I’ve said that time and time again is what my parents taught me about money, essentially don’t have credit card debt, buy a house. And beyond that, it was wing it. Figure it out. And I think in that regard, we just don’t have good mechanisms in place. And I think I’ll call out some of the pharmacy schools and associations, I want more education around that because when you’re walking out with a potential mortgage-worth of debt, we better be damn sure that we kind of know how to approach that. And right now, I think we miss that. So when I asked a question, $160,000 of debt at a 6.5% interest rate, what’s that monthly payment? And then there’s crickets. And then they found out the payment is $1,800+, it’s like gees, that’s a lot of money.

Tim Ulbrich: I couldn’t agree more. And I think as Tim Baker gets fired up about needing more in the PharmD, I think we’re going to have to put the explicit rating on this episode. The little “E” next to the I.

Tim Baker: Yeah, oh man, I think we’re going to lose our family-friendly status.

Tim Ulbrich: So the obvious pros — we’re not going to rehash these because we’ve talked through these in the DIY and the robo is that of course, you’ve got the human aspect. You’ve got the scope of if done well, it’s comprehensive, right? So I used the example of the debt to death. You’re looking at all aspects. It’s not limited on one aspect like investing. You’re looking at your whole plan. One of the things I think is interesting, though, Tim, is there’s this continued myth that if I hire a financial planner, my outcome is going to be better because they’re going to help me choose the right stocks. And therefore, I’m going to outperform the market. And we, I think from our perspective, debunk that myth. And when we were working on the book, we were looking at research published that shows between about 1.8% and 3% better returns on average per year for those that are hiring a planner versus those that don’t. Now, I think people look at those numbers and think, oh, that’s because of them helping me choose the right investment. I think what we’re trying to make a case of, though, is if you’re saying no, it’s not because of that, then where is that positive return coming from?
Tim Baker: I think it’s really a matter of — and this could even be by accident in some ways, even in my past life in the broker dealer world is — you sit in between, from an investment perspective, you sit in between your client and their money. Most investment accounts, when the advisor is managing that for their client, there’s not two sets of hands in that. The client basically says, hey, I want you, the advisor to do that. So when the sky is falling, and the client calls — and I’ve had this here recently where the client says, hey, I really think that we should sell, typically, I do a timeout and let’s talk about it. Let’s revisit what we talked about in the investment. And although like I have the butterflies in my stomach too because my portfolio is affected, and I’m invested the same exact way that my clients are. I have to remind myself just like I have to remind the client that again, over the course of time, we adhere to, stick to our guns and adhere to the investment policy statement, the allocation that we put forth that is very diversified and low cost. It will take care of us. So I think because we don’t have the ability to get in and trade and that we’re kind of standing in between, it’s almost like a safeguard on hasty behavior. It’s kind of like what I tell clients that are just having a really bad time, just spending money on impulse or not being able to save money is anything that’s over $100, you have to have a 24-48 hour cooling off period. And if you are thinking about it in 24 or 48 hours, then maybe buy it. If you’re not, then that’s a good choice. So in the same way is this too shall pass when it comes to investments, there are brighter days ahead. And we’ve enjoyed a great, bold market, a great, hot market, and we’re going to have corrections. But by and large, sometimes it’s just the investor standing in between them and their accounts.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think you use the example of the advisor there sitting in between the investor and their accounts, I think it also goes beyond just the investment component. So as you’re working with clients and you’re asking them things about what are your hopes, dreams and goals, obviously one of those, you’re going to increase your net worth, you’re going to retire successfully, all of those things. But also if someone were to say, I really want to take some time off, 10 years into my career and do this. Or I want to make sure I’m spending more time with my family or at some point, I want to go part-time, I want to start my own business, or I want to get into real estate. Somebody who is really walking that path with you can turn back to you and say, hey, remember when we talked about this? Are we working towards doing that?

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that gets to some of the cons because when you look at the industry, as you mentioned earlier, a lot of the industry is still structured in a way that incentivizes only the growth of the assets because if you’re being paid in an Assets Under Management model, you’re not incentivized to look at me in the face and say, hey, Tim, remember when you and Jess talked about Sam going to see the orca whales. Like you’d be better off saying, Tim, go open up the IRA so I can get my 1%.

Tim Baker: Right, or even more quantifiable than just saying orca whales, which is very important, is credit card debt.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: Or even student loan debt. I remember that question, and we answered that — I don’t know what episode it was, in one of the Ask Tim & Tim’s, and the advisor was basically saying to prolong the debt payments for the house and invest the difference. And to me, I look at that as like that is the advisor putting their interests ahead of their own. But like again, I’m seeing this more and more with new graduates, and this is something that I’m trying to crack the nut on with the offering that we have with students and residents in terms of financial planning is I’m seeing a lot of credit card debt. So if I walk into a financial advisor, typically because there’s an assumption of wealth and typically because they charge based on Assets Under Management, they don’t care to even know how to advise you on cash flowing, budgeting, debt management.

Tim Ulbrich: Do you have a will?

Tim Baker: Yeah, do you have a will? Those types of things.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: And I think maybe even the will is a little bit more because they want to protect the assets from the estate.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s true.

Tim Baker: So we’re talking about the next generation of wealth transfer and the next few years is going to be incredible, but if I’m an advisor, then I’m paid more money if you put money into an IRA versus paying down credit card debt. And again, I think again, the planners, they want to be able to help their clients I think by and large. But they’re just not incentivized to do so. And I think that’s a problem.

Tim Ulbrich: And so as we talk about the cons here, I think they’re obvious. And we’ve highlighted some of them so far is that we’ve made a point of emphasis saying if you’re going to be working with a financial planner, there’s a lot of work that needs to be done to make sure that you’re working with the right planner that has your interests in mind, you’re asking the right questions about how they’re charging, fiduciary standards, do they have the right credentials? And it’s not any one of the answers to those questions is going to give you the obvious yes, this person is the person I want to be looking to work with. And one of the resources I would point our listeners to is one of my favorite books I read, “Unshakeable,” by Tony Robbins or maybe Tony Robbins’ ghostwriting team, you know, I’m not sure. But either way, he does a great job of outlining what we’ve been talking about here of the — I think he quoted maybe somewhere around 2-3% actually remain in that fiduciary category. But when you look at the wide variety of planners that are out there, the credentials that it takes to become a planner, the scope of services, how they charge, all the things that we talk about on our financial planner page at YFP, I think it can become very overwhelming to think, why am I paying for what I’m paying with these services, right? And what’s the value that I’m going to be getting from these services.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think one thing to mention is I hear some prospective clients say, yeah, I heard you on the podcast, I’m thinking about working with you, but I’m also thinking about working with my parents’ financial planner. And one of the questions that I implore them to ask is what do they think about student loans? Because if student loans are a huge thing, again, 95% of advisors have no idea —

Tim Ulbrich: And they weren’t a big things for our parents, probably.

Tim Baker: Right, exactly. And they haven’t been trained up. So like they’ll say, oh, they just amortize our retirement. Or I heard one prospective client said that their advisor said, oh, these are no big deal. And you know, it makes my blood boil, in a sense, that we can do so much better. And the market is changing with how our economy is changing and what our financial picture is looking like. Like again, a lot of the stuff that we spend money on and that debts that our parents didn’t have, so we have to adapt accordingly, and it can be about training advisors on stock options and all that stuff that it’s still in the curriculum, but it doesn’t fit at all.

Tim Ulbrich: So just like pretty much anything else, all three of these buckets have pros and cons, right?

Tim Baker: Sure.

Tim Ulbrich: And we have people I know who have just commented in the Facebook group and reached out to us via email, we have people that are in all three of these buckets and are dominating. So I think the take-home point here is really, do a self-evaluation of where are you at and as you’re looking at investing as one part of the financial plan, which of these do you feel like really resonates most with you? Now, for those of you that are in interested in, hey, I really think I would benefit from a financial planner, I want to work with YFP and this, again, YourFinancialPharmacist.com/financial-planner. From there, you can get lots of information on what to look for, you can schedule a call with Tim Baker, learn more about him, see if that’s a good fit or not. And so I’d encourage you to check that out, YourFinancialPharmacist.com/financial-planner. Tim Baker, it’s been fun.

Tim Baker: Yeah, good stuff.

Tim Ulbrich: Look forward to wrapping this up next week. We’re going to do the Investing Q&A month of December. And again, to our community, happy Thanksgiving. We’re certainly grateful and thankful for you and the support that you’re provided. Have a great holiday and a great rest of your week.

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

Join the YFP Community!

YFP 070: Pre-Planning for Tax Season


 

Pre-Planning for Tax Season

On Episode 70 of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, Tim Baker, YFP Team Member and owner of Script Financial, talks with special guest Paul Eikenberg. Paul works alongside Tim at Script Financial and handles all of the tax planning and preparation for Script clients. On this episode, they discuss the new changes to the tax code and tips you can use for pre-planning for tax season.

Summary

In this episode, Tim and Paul discuss changes to the tax code that will affect your tax preparation for this year. There are several changes that have been made. The 1040 form is 23 lines and has new schedules. Standard deduction amounts are changing from $12,700 (couple) and $6,350 (individual) to $24,000 and $12,000, respectively. Personal and dependent exemptions are going away, meaning that those who have itemized before will probably take the standard deduction. Other changes include the amount that’s able to be deducted for medical expenses (now 7.5%), limits for local and state income taxes, child tax credit (now $2,000/child), student loan discharge due to death or disability is not taxable in the future, and the 529 is now available for primary and secondary education in addition to college. Paul also discusses how tax brackets have changed. There are the same number of brackets, however, the rates have been lowered. Paul suggests that most people will get a tax reduction between higher standard deductions and lower tax rates.

Tim and Paul then talk about the differences between tax planning and tax preparation. Tax planning involves long term strategy matching with your personal goals. Tax preparation is more mechanical where you plug in what happened financially from last year.

Paul offers tax review services through Script Financial. In a tax review, Paul uses your tax return from last year, current paycheck stubs, and payroll statements to project what your tax bill will be, assess if you are withholding enough from your check, and walk you through different options. Paul is still offering tax review services.

About Today’s Guest

Paul Eikenberg has been involved in starting and selling 4 businesses, has worked in the IT field as a franchisee and executive, as VP of Franchise Operation for a 500 unit Franchise System and is currently is serving as Vice Chairman of the Board of APG Federal Credit $ 1.4 billion asset Federal Credit Union. He has a wealth business operations and financial experience. In addition to being a licensed Maryland Tax Preparer, he is scheduled to completed the IRS’ Enrolled Agent exams by year end.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Baker: What’s up, everybody? Welcome to Episode 070 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Paul, thanks for joining me on today’s episode. How’s it going?

Paul Eikenberg: It’s great, Tim. Thanks for having me.

Tim Baker: Yeah, of course. So Paul, why don’t we take a step back before we kind of get into all of the exciting things that are tax. And we don’t spend enough time on taxes, which is a very important part of the financial plan. But before we kind of do a deep dive into discussing the different changes to the tax code and what our listeners can do to prep for the upcoming tax season, why don’t you tell us a little bit about yourself and how you came to be the tax guy at Script Financial?

Paul Eikenberg: Sure, I’ve had several careers now. I’ve owned two businesses. And most recently, I was working with a network service provider. When that job got eliminated, I decided that I’d go back to tax preparing and got my Maryland certification, and I’m working on the enrolled agent program with the IRS, which I’ll be completing in December. And was looking to work real hard for part of the year and not so hard the rest of year has been my life. So that’s when you and I sat down together and started talking about our financial plans, and I wasn’t ready to retire, but I wasn’t ready to go back to work full-tilt. So you and I came to an understanding that Script Financial needed a tax practice and that it was a good fit for me at the right time.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I think for me, you know, I think tax is so important because it really permeates every part of the financial plan. And I think a good understanding of one’s own tax situation and how you can practically plan for your tax situation I think is super important. So like I said, I’ve really enjoyed working with you and Anne over the years, and I feel like when I think back on the first time we met, I think we talked a lot about finances, but especially with Anne, we talked a lot about just life and just experiences and things that you guys have experienced and my experience, and it was more about the human element, I think, that we connected. And it’s been a good ride so far, and I’m lucky to have you as part of the team. So yeah, thanks again for coming on the podcast today. So let’s hop right in. So Paul, last year, the new administration passed the new tax code. The Tax Cuts and Jobs Act was signed by President Trump on December 15, 2017. What has that done to the tax system from where you sit as you’re looking at preparing taxes for 2018? What are some of the big changes?

Paul Eikenberg: Oh, everybody’s still working on figuring it out. The forms, the 1040’s changing. And the IRS has released drafts of the 1040s and all their forms, but they’re still in draft form. None of it’s been finalized. But one of the big changes you’ll see is that form 1040, which was 79 lines last year, is going to be 23 lines this year, postcard-sized, which sounds great until you find out there are six new schedules to support the 1040.

Tim Baker: Right.

Paul Eikenberg: And those lines really haven’t been removed, they’ve been moved to other schedules. So from a complexity of doing your taxes, it is I expect to be every bit as complex as last year. We will have a lot more people this year will be itemizing than previous because of the changes in the standard deduction.

Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s funny because I think the rhetoric behind the tax changes were that we want people to be able to basically file their taxes on the back of a napkin. And obviously, the 1040 itself is smaller, but it looks like they just moved the information to these new schedules, which I understand are actually numeric. So if people are familiar with the tax forms, you know, you have Schedule A, which was typically for your itemized deductions, Schedule C for business income. And now we actually have Schedule 1-6, so it actually makes it a little bit more confusing, in my opinion. Obviously, we haven’t seen kind of the final product of what the forms will actually look like, but interesting that I think it’s still going to be as complex as it was before. So let’s talk about some of the meat of some of the changes that we’re seeing. So you mentioned the new standard deduction. So walk us through some of the big — what is the standard deduction compared to the itemized deduction? And how has that changed for this upcoming year?

Paul Eikenberg: Well, in 2017, the standard deduction for an individual was $6,350. For couples, you were looking at $12,700. This year, it’s going to be $12,000 for single and $24,000 for couples.

Tim Baker: So essentially, it’s doubled.

Paul Eikenberg: It would seem that way except that your personal and dependent exemptions are going away, which was $4,050 per individual.

Tim Baker: So it looks like a little bit of the same stuff with kind of just rearranging the numbers, similar to the lines in the 1040.

Paul Eikenberg: It is. You’ll have, you know, you’ll have a higher standard deduction. So a lot of people who were itemizing last year will be taking the standard deduction this year. There’s estimates all over the board as to how many people will be affected. But you know, we saw a lot of them in our practice that were maybe $2,000-3,000 over the standard deduction last year that it made sense to itemize. This year, they’ll be taking the standard deduction.

Tim Baker: So just to back up, typically, what you want to do as a taxpayer is you want to look at what the standard deduction is and then what you’re itemized deduction is and then you want to take the greater one of those. So last year, if you were single, and you had itemized deductions of $6,500, you would have took that over the standard deduction of $6,350 because it was a greater number. So Paul, quickly, what are some examples of what would constitute an itemized deduction?

Paul Eikenberg: Mortgage interest is one of the big ones. Property taxes, state taxes, charitable contributions, employee business expenses, medical expenses can be if you have a significant amount of medical expenses. In the past, it had to be the amount over 10% of your adjusted gross income. This year, it’s dropped to 7.5%. But for the most part, unless you had a major health factor, you’re not — most people aren’t getting to itemize the medical insurance, I mean medical deduction.

Tim Baker: OK.

Paul Eikenberg: Last year, one of the big changes, state and local income taxes were deductible. They’re still deductible, but there’s a $10,000 limit on the amount of state taxes that can be itemized, and that is withholding taxes and property taxes. So higher income earners, that’s going to be a reduction in what you can itemize.

Tim Baker: So that’s big for high income earners and if you live in a part of the country where your mortgage and state and local taxes are higher, so say in the San Francisco area, that’s going to obviously affect those areas more than, you know, if you live in more of a rural area. How about, Paul, how about with kind of the, you know, if you have kids — how does the tax code change if you have kids?

Paul Eikenberg: Well, the biggest change there is the child tax credit goes from $1,000 per child to $2,000 per child. And the amount that’s refundable goes from $1,100 to $1,400. So that is the biggest change. The other change is that credit was phased out at $110,000 last year for a married couple. The phase-out has been raised to $400,000 this year.

Tim Baker: Which is huge, especially for our listeners, you know, probably as a couple are making more than $110,000. Now if you make up to $400,000, you get that $2,000 tax credit. And really good point of emphasis here is a credit is actually a dollar-for-dollar reduction from your tax bill, whereas a deduction just kind of decreases the income that you’re taxed on, so it’s not necessarily a dollar-for-dollar. And I think for the child tax credit, I believe if you’re single, I think it’s you can make up to $200,000 and still get that $2,000 credit per child. So just like you were talking about, it’s changed but the personal exemptions have gone away, but you’ve increased the child tax credit. So it’s a little bit of a — I don’t want to say bait and switch, but not a huge change. OK, so what about the — in terms of like education? We’re talking like the 529, the student loans and forgiveness. Are there big changes for that? Because that would obviously be something with listeners who have kids that are trying to avoid maybe the student loan hell that they’re in, so they’re saving for 529 or, you know, if you are a borrower and you’re trying to navigate your student loans, are there any big changes to the tax code in those two areas?

Paul Eikenberg: One of the big changes is the student loan discharge due to death or disability is not going to be taxable in the future.

Tim Baker: OK.

Paul Eikenberg: The interest deduction, the phase-out earnings have been raised a little bit but not significantly. I guess the biggest change is the 529 is going to be available for use for primary and secondary education.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so from what I understand, Paul, the 529, you can actually use for kind of your grade school, middle school, high school, which was a change because the 529 was really — before, it was just locked into just college. They did, for you homeschoolers out there, there was supposed to be a benefit that was stripped out at the last minute, so unfortunately, the 529 is no longer good for homeschooling. And so you know, from what I’m hearing more about people that work with clients that use 529s, it could actually — you could use it as a pass-through. So if you’re paying for private school, make sure you’re funding a 529 because you get a state deduction in most states. But then you can also use a 529 almost like you would use a retirement account where you’re accumulating, you know, so if you have a child and they’re going to go to school in 18 years, you’re investing that money and you’re accumulating it over time so you have a bucket of money for your child in the future to apply towards college. And then to circle back, the student loan interest deduction, it remained intact. I think it goes up a little bit, but not enough to really affect a regular pharmacist. Maybe for residents out there, the 2017 phaseouts were I think $65,000-80,000, so anything above $80,000, you didn’t get a deduction. So obviously for residents, for those maybe your PGY1, PGY2 year, you’d probably get a deduction for those years. But you know, beyond that, not necessarily. But the fact that the loans are discharged due to death and disability and not taxable because of death and disability is a big win for those people that unfortunately have to deal with that situation. So I guess, Paul, before we kind of talk about what we can do to prepare for the 2018 tax season, just about I guess the brackets. You know, I think everyone would like simplicity, but with the new tax code, do the tax brackets, how did they change? Did they change? What does that look like?

Paul Eikenberg: It’s pretty much the same number of brackets, but the rates are a little lower. The base rate is still 10%, but the next bracket down from 15% to 12%. The bracket above that went from 25% to 22%. 28% to 24% and then the next bracket, 33% to 32%. The others are pretty much the same or higher. So you know, we’re looking at overall, most of us are going to get a tax reduction between the higher standard deduction and the lower tax rate should have a positive effect on most of us out there.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I think, you know, the number of brackets, again, like it would be nice to pare those down. I think essentially, though, moving forward with this tax plan, I think it is going to be better from a taxpayer perspective. Most people’s taxes are going to be lower. So that’s something to consider as you plan, you know, for the future. And that’s a good segway into kind of our next discussion is, you know, the difference between tax planning and tax preparation. So Paul, for you, how would you separate those two things?

Paul Eikenberg: The preparation is just more mechanical. We’re taking what happened last year, plugging it in, selecting maybe a couple options, whether itemizing or standard deduction works best for you, should you make an IRA contribution up to April 15 that you didn’t make before the end of the year. But you know, that’s working in the past with a lot of things you can’t change. Tax planning is really taking a long-term strategy, kind of matching your personal goals with your tax strategy. So you know, if your goal is to pay off student loans now, you may not want to defer as much retirement income as somebody without that. It’s just kind of putting all those pieces together and, you know, when we look at planning, like a mid-year plan for somebody, we’re going to look at where you are now, have you had enough taxes withheld that you won’t have a surprise come April? And are you taking advantage of the HSAs? Are you definitely getting the matches in your IRA, in your retirement programs?

Tim Baker: Sure.

refinance student loans

Paul Eikenberg: You know. If you have a business, rental property, are you doing everything you can? Are you planning out your expenses for those to mitigate your taxes as much as possible?

Tim Baker: Right. Yeah, and the way I look at prep versus planning, tax prep versus tax planning is the prep I think is the very reactive in nature. You’re like, ope, this is what happened for 2018. Let’s plug in the numbers and see what pops out. And sometimes, it’s a surprise, you get a refund. And sometimes, it’s where you’re writing Uncle Sam a check. And that can’t be fun.

Paul Eikenberg: I know from preparing a lot of taxes that the most painful thing is to be doing your taxes, waiting and being surprised with a big tax bill instead of a small refund you were expecting.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so maybe the approach we take is maybe self-preservation too because it’s tough to sit across the table and say, ‘Hey, you owe a lot of taxes.’ So obviously, what we’re trying to do from a tax planning perspective is get out in front of it, be proactive, and actually, you know, don’t let really the tax situation control you. You’re controlling your — whether it’s, like you said, deferring the taxes or avoiding the taxes, whatever that looks like.

Paul Eikenberg: If you’re proactive, you have a lot more options.

Tim Baker: Yes. Yeah. And for some people, you know, we talk about having funds set aside, whether it’s for home maintenance, emergency fund, a vacation fund, a lot of people don’t have a tax bill fund that they can just write a check and say, ‘Here you go, Uncle Sam. I didn’t pay you enough over the year, so here’s a sum of money.’ So that definitely could be painful. So Paul, let’s break down. You kind of talked through it a little bit, but when you sit down and you do a tax review with a client, what does that look like? How does that play out?

Paul Eikenberg: Let’s say we’re doing one for you now. You know, what I’d want to see is the most recent paycheck stubs. You know, we’d want to look at your last year tax return, and we’d really take your payroll statement and look at where you’re earning are, what type of retirement program you’re in, what other type of health insurance — are you pre-tax, HSAs — and project all the contributions through the end of the year for earnings and withholding, withholding taxes, and pre-tax contributions. From there, kind of review the tax return from last year, look for other sorts of income, deductions, project those, and then we’d sit down for a half hour conference and kind of go over the assumptions that I make projecting your situation through the end of the year, be sure that if you had capital gains last year, rental income, any of those other type of items, that we’re working on the proper assumptions.

Tim Baker: Right.

Paul Eikenberg: You know, are there estimated taxes or anything we’re missing that you’ve already paid Uncle Sam. And from there, we kind of project what we expect your tax bill to be, what your withholding’s going to be, if nothing changes, are you going to have a refund or owe money? And then we kind of walk through your options. To me, the HSAs are a great tool. Everybody should be getting their matching retirement, whether that’s pre-tax or a Roth 401k. If your employer’s matching it, that’s something you want to be sure you’re taking advantage of. And we’d kind of walk through your options of is there anything you should be doing to mitigate the taxes? Have you had too much withheld? Should you lower it? Have you had not enough withheld? Do you need to increase it? You know, are you going to be subject to penalties if nothing changes? Maybe you need to make an estimated tax payment. So there are a lot of things we look at.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and it’s great stuff. What I really like about kind of your review is that, you know, you take the pay stub — and it’s funny because when I used to work for a company, I would get paid with a paper check, I’d rip the check off, I’d deposit it, and I’d throw the pay stub on a pile. And I’d never really look at it. But actually, there’s a lot of good information, a lot of good nuggets on the pay stub about what you’re actually paying into. And it could be your retirement fund or long-term disability or whatever that is. And what I really like about your system is, you know, you use that information to kind of set up where we’ve been throughout the year and then extrapolate that forward to where we expect you to be. And what I like is is that you generally say, ‘Hey, if nothing changes, you’re going to owe $2,000. Or you’re going to get back $2,000.’ You’re going to be basically equal. You won’t owe or get anything back.’ And then if there is an imbalance, then we kind of discuss some of the levers that we can pull. So you know, you mentioned the HSA, increasing a contribution into your 401k, whatever those things are. And I think another one that probably we could talk about is just, you know, changes to your payroll withholding, the W4 form. A lot of people, when you begin a new job, you fill out the W4, and you don’t really look at it. But that W4 form basically dictates to your employer how much tax should be withheld from your paycheck. And then if you owe more taxes than what is withheld, then that’s when you actually have to write a check to Uncle Sam. So it’s kind of important to really understand that form itself and what that does. And sometimes just changing that is one of the levers that we pull. So instead of paying at the end of the year, you just pay a little bit more throughout the course of the year. So these are I think levers that I think are important to look at and go through and be able to, again, be more proactive in your tax situation than just say, ‘Well, this is what happened last year. Cross my fingers, hopefully I don’t get any surprises,’ and go from there. So Paul, are you still doing the reviews for this year? I know we’re into October. What does that look like?

Paul Eikenberg: Yeah, we’ll probably continue doing them until the Thanksgiving holiday is the plan right now.

Tim Baker: OK. So I think, you know, for listeners out there, if you’re interested, some people, you know, really enjoy to do a great job of analyzing your own tax situation. But if you’re not one of them, and you can think of a million other things to do to spend your time, you know, we can definitely help. Paul can definitely help. I think he does a great job with my clients. So you know, if you’re interested, sign up for the Script Financial tax review, and it basically includes a lot of the things we talked about, you know, analyzing your current pay stubs, you know, doing an income projection, you know, for the rest of the year, reviewing last year’s returns to see if there’s any discrepancy. So you know, if there’s big changes like you got married, you bought a house, you had a baby, those are going to affect, you know, obviously your tax situation. And at the end of the review, really to project out kind of your year-end tax status. And with that, basically Paul delivers that in a 30-minute video conference where, again, you review all the assumptions and projections and kind of go over the steps that you need to take to kind of, you know, pull the levers and say, ‘If we want to get money, this is what we would do. If we want to not owe the government money, this is what you should do.’ And I think it’s of great value. So normally, a tax review like this, it would be priced at $99. Between now and Nov. 20, so this episode will be released on Oct. 18, so about a month, we’re running basically a promo for 20% off. So that just brings it down to $79. So if you go to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/tax and use the coupon code YFP, you’ll get that 20% off the $100 price. So it’s YourFinancialPharmacist.com/tax to get that — to sign up for the review and use the coupon code YFP for the discount. So Paul, you know, good stuff today. We kind of talked about changes to the 2018 upcoming tax year, changes to the 1040, it looks like we’ve added some numeric schedules, the standard deduction has increased, and we talked about some of the changes with, you know, with the new tax code with deductions and credits, and then really what you can do for your own tax situation to kind of get in front of the ball and make sure that you have really no surprises for, you know, this upcoming tax season. So Paul, anything else to add before we kind of sign off here for the day?

Paul Eikenberg: Yeah, one more thing to think about that we think we’re going to see a trend with this year with the standard deduction going up. In the past, people have tried to pay their property taxes on December 31, made charitable donations so that they got those in in time to be deductible in the current year. I think the trend’s going to be that a lot of the people will be doubling up on those. They’ll be looking at their tax situation and instead of making donations in 2018, they may make twice as many in 2019. And think about your property taxes as to whether it makes sense — like in Maryland, you’d pay your property taxes from July to July and you have an option of breaking it up. So it may make sense to pay more in one year and then take the standard — alternate your itemized deduction one year to the standard deduction the next year. So that is one of the things we anticipate being a good strategy for quite a few people out there.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I think just a tip in kind of the direction of doing some proper planning and being as efficient with your tax situation as you can. Like I said, if the listeners are interested in working with Paul and doing a tax review, it’s YourFinancialPharmacist.com/tax and use the coupon code YFP for the 20% discount. So Paul, good stuff today. Thanks for coming on the podcast, really appreciate it. And to the listeners, thanks again for listening. And we’ll catch you next time.

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

Join the YFP Community!

YFP 068: Pros/Cons of Dave Ramsey’s Baby Steps


 

Pros/Cons of Dave Ramsey’s Baby Steps

On Episode 068 of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, Tim Ulbrich, Founder of Your Financial Pharmacist, and Tim Baker, YFP Team Member and owner of Script Financial, discuss the pros and cons of Dave Ramsey’s Baby Steps and how they apply to the pharmacy professional.

Summary of Episode

Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker discuss Dave Ramsey’s baby steps in this week’s episode by sharing their own experiences and answering questions from the YFP community. Dave Ramsey’s 7 steps include:

Step 1 = Save $1,000 for a starter emergency fund

Step 2 = Pay of all debt using the debt snowball

Step 3 = Save up 3-6 months of expenses in savings

Step 4 = Invest 15% of household income into Roth IRAs and pre-tax retirement accounts

Step 5 = Save for kids college

Step 6 = Pay off home early

Step 7 = Build wealth and give

Overall, Tim and Tim feel that Dave Ramsey’s baby steps lay out are a great framework for an individual or family to follow and then iterate to their own needs. However, these steps aren’t a financial plan and shouldn’t be used solely as one. There are so many scenarios and possible financial goals and plans that differ from person to person. For some, it might make more sense to follow the steps in a different order or to adjust the amount of savings or contribution toward retirement. Often times steps 5, 6 and 7 are happening simultaneously instead of consecutively following one another once the previous one is completed. It’s important to weigh the emotional part of your financial journey, your attitudes, and feelings toward debt and your goals, and what time frame you are working with when thinking about paying off your debt. These steps don’t include other important aspects of creating a financial plan, such as obtaining disability insurance, potentially using the avalanche method when paying off debt, or really take into consideration the amount of student loan debt a pharmacist graduates with.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Welcome to Episode 068 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Tim Baker, excited to be back together on the mic. I think it’s been awhile, right?

Tim Baker: It has been awhile. I feel like we cultivated this baby in the podcast and I’ve, like, been absent for the last few weeks. So I’m excited to be back on.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, we had a great month in the month of September doing home buying, all things home buying. Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPH joined us. Excited about the partnership with Nate. Excited also to jump into the topic we have today, discussing the 7 baby steps that many are familiar with, recommended by Dave Ramsey. We’re going to talk about the pros and the cons and how we think they do and don’t fit to a pharmacy professional. And we’re going to weave in throughout the show feedback from you, the YFP community, that we’ve gotten via email, the YFP Facebook group and via LinkedIn as well. So Tim, it’s my understanding you’re out at the XYPN meeting right now, correct?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I’m in St. Louis for XYPN Live. I think this is the fourth annual meeting. So XY Planning Network is a group of fee-only CFPs that are trying to bring financial planning to kind of the Gen X, Gen Y generation. So yeah, it’s been good to, you know, rub elbows with some of my colleagues and just get good ideas and bring them back to Script Financial and see how I can better serve clients. So it’s been a good week so far.

Tim Ulbrich: And you’re rocking your YFP T-shirt today? Is that right?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I’m flying the flag, Tim. So you know, we’re going to be talking to a lot of different vendors and things like that. Actually, it’s funny. I was telling you before we started recording that people, you know, my colleagues have kind of noticed what we’ve been doing on the YFP side of things and have taken interest in that. So it’s kind of cool to see that, and yeah, so definitely rocking the YFP T-shirt today.


Tim Ulbrich: Exciting time. So let’s jump into this topic. You know, when I think of the Dave Ramsey 7 Baby Steps — and we’re going to link to them in the show notes, and I’ll talk about them briefly — but for those that are not familiar, we’ll go through them quickly and link to more information. This is such an emotionally charged topic, and so when we posted this week, I said, ‘Hey, YFP Facebook group, YFP community, we’re going to do a podcast recording on the Ramsey 7 Baby Steps. What do you think the good, the bad, how does it work? What are the pros and cons? How does it apply to a pharmacist or not? And for our community personally, those that have walked through this step, what are some success stories or challenges they’ve had?’ So I think based on the response that we got in that post, we’ve got lots to talk about. So you ready to do this?

Tim Baker: Let’s do it.

Tim Ulbrich: Alright, so onto the show. Here’s what we’re going to do. I’m going to walk through briefly the 7 baby steps, so for those that haven’t heard of them before, are not familiar, I’m going to talk about them very quickly. Then, I’m going to get Tim Baker’s thoughts on his opinions at a high level. What does he think about the baby steps? Where do you they work? Where are maybe some areas that need more flexibility? And when it comes to advising his clients, where has he seen these work in both the success route but also in maybe areas that he may disagree with. Now, we’re going to weave in some comments and feedback from the YFP community throughout. So Dave Ramsey’s 7 Baby Steps. If you haven’t heard them before, here they are in order:

Step 1 is save $1,000 for what he calls a starter or a baby emergency fund. Now, we’ll come back and talk about this. We talked in Episode 026 baby stepping into your financial plan, two things to focus on first, which an emergency fund was one of those. We’ll link to that in the show notes. And we also have a blog post on why having an emergency fund matters, so if you want to learn more about this topic, we’ll link to that as well. So Step No. 1, baby emergency fund, $1,000. This is all about getting a quick win and making sure you’re starting to build some protection into your financial plan.
Step No. 2, probably the step, Tim, that causes the most debate — pay off all, all debt using the debt snowball.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: So this is referring to credit card debt, student loan debt, car debt. The only exception here to the word all is mortgage, the primary residence, which we’ll talk back and we’ll come back to this in Step No. 6. So Step No. 2 is pay off all debt except for the mortgage using the debt snowball. And we’ll talk about what that means and we’ll dig into that further.

Step No. 3 then is save up 3-6 months of expenses in an emergency fund. So we mentioned Step No.1 is save $1,000 for a starter emergency fund. Step No. 3 is to build up a full emergency fund, which is 3-6 months of expenses. Now, one that he doesn’t publish on his website but he talks often about is Baby Step 3b. And this, I think, Tim, is codeword for “Woops, I didn’t really think about a home. Where should I put it?” So it’s Baby Step 3b, which is save 10-20% down for a home. And I’ve actually heard him reference 10% in some areas, his Financial Peace University class, but also 20% on his podcast. So that’s Step No. 3 and 3b.

Then Step No. 4 as we’re working through these one by one is invest 15% of household into Roth IRAs in pre-tax retirement accounts. So invest 15% of household income into Roth IRAs and pre-tax retirement accounts.

Step No. 5 is save for kids’ college.

Step No. 6 is pay off the home early.

And Step No. 7, probably the most nebulous one, is build wealth and give.

OK, so those are the 7 Baby Steps, and I think it’s worth noting that his recommendation that I’ve heard throughout the podcast and listening to it over the past several years is that steps No. 4, 5, and 6 are actually happening together. So of course you’re not going to invest in 15% possible income into Roth IRAs and pre-tax retirement accounts and be done and check it off. That’s going to be ongoing. Saving for kids’ college is going to happen over a period of time. And paying off the home early will happen over time as well. So steps 4, 5, and 6 are happening over time. So there you have it, the 7 Baby Steps. And I can speak a little bit from personal experience. My wife and I used the 7 Baby Steps in our journey paying off $200,000 of student loan debt. And we worked through them, we made some modifications along the way, which I think is going to lend itself nicely as we get some questions and feedback from the YFP community. So Tim Baker, your thoughts and opinions at a high level on the 7 Baby Steps. Where do they work? And in your experience working with clients, what are some of the successes you’ve seen in clients using these seven baby steps? And where do you think they maybe have a little bit more downside or maybe points of contention?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think that as a framework, I like it. Now, I think that’s part of the problem with financial planning — because this is essentially like a framework of a financial plan. And I think a lot of people will throw some shade towards Ramsey because, you know, they say, well, it’s not a one-size-fits-all. And I think financial advisors will sometimes give him some backlash because of, you know, he’s too focused on the debt. And if you remember me talking through like, you know, a lot of advisors are paid based on investments. So they’re not incentivized for you to work through your credit card debt or things like that. And then I think there’s just some disagreements about like his particular investment choices. But as a framework, and I think in some of our engagement with the Facebook group and LinkedIn and things like that, there are people that are identifying, saying, ‘Hey, we’re in Step 2. We moved to Step 3, and then we had to move back,’ things like that. So it is more or less a working financial plan that people can identify with and at least benchmark off of. So I’m in favor of that, and I think it’s good to kind of get the blood up a little bit and talk about these things. But I think there are some people that maybe are a little bit more financially savvy that, you know, have their ducks in a row. And they say, ‘Well, this isn’t necessarily how I would do it.’ But for a lot of people that aren’t in that position — and I come across a lot of them, and they eventually become clients, which is a good thing. Where should I put an emergency fund? How much? Why 15%? And what’s a Roth IRA? That type of thing. And I’m not really being facetious, I think some of these things are, they’re true. So for people that go through Dave Ramsey stuff, you know, there’s an assumption, I think, afterwards that they’re going to know more or less which direction they need to go. And from a financial advisor’s standpoint, they don’t necessarily make good clients because they feel like they’re set. But I do think that there are some strengths but also limitations to me overall to the 7 steps. So for example, you know, if I look at the first one, save $1,000 for your emergency fund. You know, I do have clients that are in this position where they have, you know, hundreds of thousands of dollars of student loans, but they have $30,000 or $40,000 worth of credit card debt. So you know, we’re just trying to dig our way out of, you know, paying through the credit card debts but then, you know, having a buffer of like $1,000, that’s a huge step in that direction. So even — you know, some people might look at this like eh, this isn’t for pharmacists. I would say not so fast. There are some situations where that’s going to be true. So like the way I talk about, and I think we talked about this in Episode 026 of the podcast is, you know, let’s baby step our way into that kind of the foundational part of the financial plan, being the emergency fund. So I look at it as kind of look at it in phases. So maybe Phase 1 is $1,000. And as we work our way through some of the — and I think about more the consumer, not predatory debt, but in that where you’re 16-17% — to focus on that first and really not tend too much to the emergency fund. But as you work your way through that, Phase 2 might be to get that to $5,000 because the fact of the matter is, if you’re a single pharmacist and you have a good amount of credit card debt and student loan debt, that alone with your rent could put your emergency in the $20,000-25,000 because you’re multiplying that monthly number by 6, essentially. So for a lot of people to get to that number, they’re going to default on their credit cards before that happens.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s probably the most common thing we hear from pharmacists is they look at this and say, ‘OK, Step 1 is I need a $1,000 baby emergency fund. Step 2, I have to pay off all my debt.’ And so they may be looking at who knows? $200,000 in student loan debt, $20,000 in credit card debt, a $20,000 car note. Then I need to get a full 3-6 months of an emergency fund and then I start thinking about investing. I think that’s the piece where people are like, wait a minute. I’m not going to be investing for 10 or 15 years? And we’re going to come back to that because I think that, you know, the framework, as you mentioned, obviously — and Dave would admit this — is that mathematically, this is not the most advantageous framework to operate from. It’s really a behavioral framework to help people really get the motivation and the mindset and to have some structure around the steps they’re working through. And if we have a thousand people listening to this podcast when we release it, at the end of the day, we have a thousand different financial situations. And I think that speaks to — to your point — that speaks to that this plan by itself probably should not, in my opinion, stand alone but could be paired with the work of a financial planner, could be customized. And I think that if you look at the plan in and of itself, it’s not meant to be a standalone. It doesn’t deal with issues like insurance, end of life planning, investing strategies. You know, we got some feedback from the Facebook group, which I thought was cool. Matt said that he agrees with a lot of the baby steps in terms of them being introductory and getting yourself on track. They’re a good blueprint to getting out of debt. The only problem is what to do after the steps are complete, so they’re not wealth-building steps. And so if you look at Step 7, this idea of building wealth and giving, obviously that’s not necessarily a blueprint for what you should be doing in terms of investing and saving and strategies and end-of-life planning and all those other things that come along with it. However, I will say for those that are listening — and my wife and I just experienced this firsthand — if you feel like you are extremely overwhelmed, don’t know where to start. If you and your spouse maybe where applicable are having difficulty getting on the same page, I think that these steps or it could be another stepwise approach, but having a stepwise approach that you’re working together and achieving and feeling like you’re getting momentum forward, even if that’s not necessarily the most mathematically advantage approach, you can’t speak enough to the value of getting momentum and getting those wheels going forward. Because Tim, how many people do we talk to that say, ‘I’ve been spinning my wheels for seven years, and I feel like I haven’t made much progress,’ right?

Tim Baker: Right. And we’re proponents of — I think there’s some weight to the emotional side of the — we talk about this in the student loan course over and over again. It can’t be just about the numbers. And of course, we’re talking about, you know, for a lot of people, does it make sense to look at PSLF versus not? And in this scenario, in these seven steps, PSLF I don’t think would even be entertained because if you’re trying to pay off in Step 2, the non-mortgage debts as quickly as possible, it’s not even a thing. So if you’re someone that has a lot of student loan debt, and you have the emotion behind it that, hey, you’re anxious or you’re concerned, you can’t sleep at night, these are all things that people have said to me. Then we weight that somewhat heavily because it doesn’t make sense to take a more maybe of a reactive approach, say from a Public Student Loan Forgiveness, and you want to just be more reactive to that. But I think to your point, Tim, that people get riled up about this because potentially in some situations, especially for pharmacists, you might be waiting 10+ years to start putting any money towards retirement and not, you know, capitalize on match and things like that. And I think that’s where I fundamentally disagree with this model.

Tim Ulbrich: So before we go into some of the more detailed questions, let me read off some of those that commented from the Facebook group that talk about the support of this model and I think some of the positive aspects of the success that it can lead to and the behavioral aspects of the model. And then we’ll dive a little bit deeper into maybe where tweaks could be made to this model, depending on individual situations and scenarios.

So Scott says, “The plan is great. It teaches you to focus on just a few things and do them with intensity. You also need to keep in mind that he only teaches very low-risk strategies. If you lost everything like he did, I’m sure you’d have a similar mindset.” So what Scott’s referring to there, if you haven’t heard his story before, Dave essentially — I think it was in his mid-20s — got pretty deep in real estate investing, kind of lost everything. But I do think to his point, as I think through Jess and I going through this approach, intensity is a good word, right?

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Because when you’re going all in on one step and you’re singularly focused — and yes, to the comments we received, yes that may be at the expense of other things — but that singular focus has to be factored in somewhere into the equation with the mathematical components as well.

Tim Baker: And I think he uses — what does he use, like gazelle-like? You want to be gazelle-like. I think that’s his term. And I see that, you know. I have clients that come in, I want to buy a house, I want to travel the world, I want to start saving for my kids’ education. There’s I want to pay for my wedding, there’s a million different things. And part of my job is to cut through some and say, OK, what’s most important? Because you can do a little of a lot of things, or you can do a lot of one or two things. Typically, the latter is a better prescription for that.

Tim Ulbrich: Dalton says, “You can’t really argue with its effectiveness. The number of people who have gotten out of debt and built wealth through his plan are incredible. He even acknowledges that the plan doesn’t necessarily make mathematical sense all the time because the benefits of compound interest and retirement savings but always follows that up with the fact that being in debt doesn’t make mathematical sense either because if personal finance was all about math, people wouldn’t spend more than they make. I think that it makes sense for pharmacists mostly if they live like a college student still after graduation. You could actually pay off your loans decently fast, as long as lifestyle creep doesn’t happen.” And then he goes on to talk a little bit more about Baby Step No. 2. So let’s jump in there because I think we had a couple questions from the group about Baby Step 2, which makes sense, right? Because pharmacists are facing average debt loads of $160,000. So Dave Ramsey, in speaking to whatever, 5 or 10 million listeners every week, obviously their average debt load is not $160,000. So that is a unique piece to our audience. And Cole asks the question, “I’d love to hear your thoughts about stopping retirement investing and losing the match while in Baby Step 2.” So talk to me about your thoughts as you’re working with clients, typical pharmacist, $160,000 of debt, maybe you’re thinking about this in the frame of these baby steps. We’ve talked before about the match being a no-brainer, let’s take it. But how do you balance this retirement and student loans or at least looking at the match component while in Baby Step 2.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so just a comment on Dave and like the student loans. Like, I think when I first started hearing some of his stuff about the student loans, like he would almost fall off his chair when like a doctor — I think for awhile, I think a fair criticism of him was that he was a little out of touch. And I’ve seen some things where he’s like almost browbeat people, and that’s not productive. But I think in more recent times, he’s come around and he understands a little bit more about the student loan picture. So that’s the first thing. I think the third thing for me personally is — and I say this when we speak to pharmacy schools and, you know, different organizations is — you know, they say the two certainties in life: death and taxes. And I would add that you should, for the most part, match your 401k or your 403b. I think that is for the majority of people the thing to do because it’s one of those things that the whole thing, it’s free money. Unless you’re in dire, dire straits from a predatory or some type of debt, I wouldn’t do it. If it’s student loan debt, absolutely. You need to be doing the match.

Tim Ulbrich: So death, taxes, and the match are three certain things in life?

Tim Baker: I think so. That’s Tim Baker’s amendment to that. So I think by and large, if you’re not doing that — because most of the time, especially because it comes out tax-free, you’re not missing it. So if you’re an employer — and most employers, it’s 3%, 5%. It’s not like you’re asking to give up 10%. Some are structured like that to get the full match, but to get the full match is typically a small percentage of your income. So that would be my thoughts there. And you know, I kind of with the invest the 15% of household income, I kind of say as a general rule of thumb, which these are, to start getting it in your brainpiece for newly minted pharmacists and new practitioners is a race to 10%. Because what often happens is that you do get the match, you get 5%, and you have the 401k inertia. I talk to you years later, and you haven’t increased it at all. So in their mind, I try to plant the seed. It’s a race to 10%, so if you couple that with the match, you know, you are in that 15% range. And that’s typically, when we do the nest egg calculations, which we did on the APhA webinar here recently, the Investment 101 and 102, the nest egg is going to show that that is, more likely than not, true to be in that range.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think this is a great example as you think through Baby Step 2 and this question that Nicole throws out there is that this is not a black and white framework, as we’ve already talked about, especially with everyone’s customized situation. So if you’ve heard Dave talk on the podcast or taken any of his courses like Financial Peace, I think he uses an average time range of debt repayment too of about 18 months or less. So again, a pharmacist with $160,000 as a graduate does not match the national average of somebody coming out from undergrad with $25,000-30,000. Now of course they have a higher income potential, but he’s then under the assumption — when you think about steps 3, 4, 5, 6 and so on — that that debt in Step 2 is going to be gone quickly. Now, if you’re somebody listening that’s got $30,000 or $40,000 of debt, maybe that’s the case. But if you’re somebody that has $200,000 of debt, you know, unless you’re hustling like Adam Patterson-style, Tim Church-style, that’s probably not going to be happening. So now, you have to have this discussion and balance and work with somebody like you as a financial planner to say, OK, what is this timeline of debt repayment? Not that we’re going to carry this on forever, but what is the debt repayment strategy? And then how do we now fit retirement savings into there. Because you and I would both agree that if somebody’s paying off their loans for 10 years, probably not contributing to retirement is not a good idea. Not probably — it’s not a good idea.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: But if somebody’s hustling for 2-3 years, that conversation is very different, especially if there’s some behavioral momentum that’s going to be happening. Now, I would agree with you 100% that that match is a given in all of those situations, it doesn’t matter whatever the debt repayment period is in my opinion. I think that that should be there.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I think the other thing to take note of, call out here that I commend for him is, you know, he’s talking — again, I’ve listened to him talk to doctors that have a truckload of debt. And he’s like, “Oh, you’ve got to hustle.” Even though the make hundreds of thousands of dollars, he’s encouraging them. He’s like, you’ve got to take up, you’ve got to get extra shifts. So he’s not resting on your laurels just because you make a six-figure income. So you know, the people that we’ve highlighted, the Pattersons, the Churches, they’re trying to hustle. They’re thinking of additional ways to increase income, which I think is something that kind of falls by the wayside because we’re always talking about how can we cut our expenses? But it’s a two-sided equation. So I would say that that is something to focus on as well.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and just to wrap up this Baby Step 2 and how do you balance the loans with the investing and what’s your time period, I would say that, you know, for many listening, the answer’s going to be different. We’ve talked a lot on the podcast before and live events that we’ve done about how do you make this decision between investing and paying down loans. I don’t think we need to get in the weeds here, but this really comes down to the factors like interest rates, what is your feelings toward the debt? How is your investing style? All of these things, and for everyone listening, that answer’s going to be a little bit different, which will obviously help determine where you’re going to go with that. Tim, Tyrell asks that he says that he’d like to hear pros and cons of paying off house versus student loans if working toward PSLF or towards PSLF or other forgiveness components. So he’s talking about working for a qualifying company, pursuing Public Student Loan Forgiveness, and obviously then that changes your strategy about paying off your loans, correct?

Tim Baker: Yeah, because, you know, typically, the way to optimize that strategy is to take, you know, Step 4, which is invest 15% of Roth IRA and pre-tax retirement accounts and really cross off the Roth because the Roth is after-tax and put as much money as humanly possible into pre-tax retirement because what that effectively does is lower your adjusted gross income, which affects how much you — which is the number that calculates your payment for student loans. So the lower that your AGI is, the lower that your payment is, and the more that you potentially will be forgiven. So there’s a lot of moving pieces to that. So I would say if you’re weighing paying off a house versus student loans, to me, the picture is are we getting the $18,500 into the 401k or the 403b maybe since it’s a nonprofit. Are we maxing that out? You’re probably not afforded a pre-tax IRA deduction because pharmacists typically make too much. But are you maxing out the $3,450 or the $6,900 if you’re a family in the HSA to get that if you have a high deductible plan. Once those things are checked off, then I would say, OK, you know, what are the goals? And maybe paying off the house is that. But if that house is, you know, if the rate’s 3.25, I don’t know. I don’t know if that’s the best way to go. Some people, again, I know Leah Donnells made a comment on this, and she’s a client of mine, and her mantra is, their mantra is they want to get through the debt as quickly as possible. So they, regardless of what the mortgage or interest rate is, they want that out from underneath them. And I can’t blame them because if you think about, hey, we’re striving for financial independence, what is a greater measurement of that when you don’t have to pay the bank your rent or mortgage anymore? So Tyrell, that’s a good question. But again, there’s a lot of moving pieces and I would say focus on the pre-tax accounts and max those out before, you know, throwing more money towards the house.
Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, you know Dave’s a big advocate in Step 2 about the debt snowball. And Ryan in LinkedIn says, you know, as he’s talking about the pros and cons of this model, he says, “Why should I use the debt snowball method? It works great for those people who really benefit from the psychological impact and reward of paying off small debts. But for those who don’t benefit from it will potentially spend more money in the long run.” So give us the quick overview of the debt snowball, how that contrasts to the avalanche method. And as you’re working with clients, how do you guide or advise them in terms of which of those methods may work best for them?

Tim Baker: So the debt snowball method is basically where you write out all of your or you have all of your debts laid out: what kind of debt it is, what the interest rate, what the minimum monthly payment is, and what the balance is. And the idea is to pick the debt that has the lowest balance and pay the minimums on all the other debts. And then for the one that has the lowest balance, you want to pay as much toward that as humanly possible. So when that one falls off, when that debt is paid and dead and gone, then you roll that payment into the next lowest balance. And then when that one falls off, you roll that payment into the next lowest balance. So this is really trying to clear liabilities from the balance sheet. And the idea is that that gives you, if you focus on the lowest one, it gives you a psychological advantage, it gives you momentum, that type of thing. The avalanche method, in contrast, is where you do the same thing except the priority payment is based on the interest rate, not on the lowest balance. So you want to focus on the highest interest rate — this is typically credit card debt and that type of thing — and you pay the minimums on everything else. And then when the highest interest rate falls off, then you direct your attention to the next highest interest rate. So from a math perspective, this makes the most sense because you want to clear those debts off that you’re paying the most interest on. So that’s really the difference between those two. Now, working with clients, theoretically, I coin flip. It’s one of those things where from a math perspective, yes, it does make sense to do the avalanche. But it’s the same thing with everything else. If you’re doing this on your own, don’t get into the paralysis by analysis. Just pick one method and go. For a client that I have, you know, $30,000 of credit card debt with that’s spread out across 20 different cards, to me, it’s just about clearing the balance sheet so she can, you know, work through those effectively. So now, it’s more of an organizational thing. So in that situation, we’re employing the snowball method because it’s almost unwieldy to handle. So it just really depends on where your mind is, if you’re running the math and you’re maybe less emotional towards it, avalanche. If you’re thinking that, hey, it’d be really nice to log into your credit card account or if I plug my client portal that you can sign up for on my website, Script Financial, you can see all of your, you can link all of your accounts and see a dynamic net worth statement. If you see a list of liabilities there that’s $10,000, $12,000 deep, and you really want to log in in six months and see $6,000, then I would say probably the snowball method would be the better route to go.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think the time period is critically important here as well, right? So if you’re talking about a wide array of interest rates over a long period of time, say 10 years, obviously the math on that is going to become more advantageous toward the avalanche method. If you’re talking about I’m going to pay off whatever debt we’re referring to in a short period of time, and the interest rate’s aren’t that different, or some combination of that in a couple years, then obviously the math doesn’t matter as much. Does it still matter? Yes, of course. But you have to, again, make this determination about your own behavioral patterns and choices and how important that momentum is or is not. And as I think back to the journey that Jess and I took, that momentum for us was critical, even at the expense of paying a little bit more interest because as we were going through whatever step, let’s use Step 2 as an example, if we were going through a snowball method, if I knew we needed $2,000 more to pay off this loan to get to the next one, we were that more motivated to stay on budget or to look for additional opportunities to earn income, whatever it be, that I’m not sure for us collectively as a couple, we would have been as motivated if we would have been working that through the avalanche method. So did we spend a little bit more interest? Yes. But did we get it paid off faster? For us, I think we probably did. But again, back to the point of customization for somebody else listening, somebody else commenting, that may be a very different situation if for them, it’s very black-and-white, and they can work the system going through the interest rates. I want to encourage for a minute. Amber posted on the Facebook group that, “My spouse and I follow these baby steps, and they are great for getting out of debt. Our problem keeps showing itself on Step No. 3, which is the full 3-6 months of emergency fund. We complete it and are ready to move on, and we have somewhat. But then, wham, something happens and we are right back on No. 3. We’ve been stuck like that for several years now, but living without debt is really freeing and wonderful.” So I think again, it speaks to the power of getting out of debt. But I think is something Jess and I felt as well is that when you talk about something like paying off debt, it can be very exciting to see that balance come down. When you talk about investing, it can be very exciting. Building an emergency fund is not necessarily super exciting. And so obviously, they’ve had some things come up that have derailed them from doing that. But I think for those that are in the grind of building an emergency fund, to your point earlier about how much that could be, $15,000, $20,000, $25,000, $30,000, $35,000, that’s not super exciting. But it’s certainly a critically important step and a foundational part of a financial plan. Tim, wanted to get your thoughts on this. This I think speaks to I think maybe where you have some customization to this seven-step plan. Katie says, “After graduation, we DR’ed our way to becoming debt free.” I love that he has his own DR.

Tim Baker: Yeah, when do we get YFP’ed?

Tim Ulbrich: Seriously, YFP our financial plan, right?

Tim Baker: Can we hashtag YFP’ed? Get that trending on Twitter maybe?

Tim Ulbrich: I like that. Be a trademark, yeah. “The main tweaks we made in the beginning were splitting steps 2 and 3 equally, so equal amounts going toward the emergency fund and debt reduction until we had enough saved, and then we maxed out our own tax-preferred accounts before kids college. It’s not a perfect system, great for debt elimination, not ideal for investing, but it’s simple and gives a roadmap for those starting out. It worked well for us.” So what do you think about that idea of balancing the savings for emergency fund with paying off student loans or other debt?
Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean I think that’s exactly what the point is is like, this is a template for then people can iterate off of. And this is what I was talking about with like having, you know, Phase 1, Phase 2, Phase 3 in terms of, you know, Phase 1, it might be get the $1,000 or $2,000. Have a emergency fund that probably covers 80% of emergencies in your situation. And then from there in Phase 2, now maybe go through and start paying off debt and apply maybe little. I think this is a perfect example of how, you know, they looked at the situation and said, well, this doesn’t work entirely for us, so we’re just going to iterate. And again, bias, you know, I think they did it well themselves working off the two of them, but this is where I think a financial planner can come in and provide a little bit of guidance and objective opinion and say, this is what I would do and these are the recommendations. So I think that’s the power of this is people look at it as a benchmark and then they can iterate off of it and apply it to their own lives.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And so just to build on this a little bit more, Mark asked and has a comment in the Facebook group, and I can speak to this one. I dealt with this last year. He says, “I’m on Baby Step 2 and I’m really concerned about this idea of not having a credit score. Has anyone used manual underwriting to buy a house? And probably because I don’t fully understand a credit score, but I’m a little concerned about not getting a job because of it.” So I think what he’s referring to is that Dave’s a big advocate for no credit cards, cut them up, get rid of them, pay off all your debt, etc. And obviously, there’s some concern about having no credit when it comes to purchasing a home. If you currently are paying a mortgage, Mark, what I learned throughout this process is that that mortgage payment will still provide you with a credit score. Now, if you don’t have a mortgage and you have no credit cards, then obviously after a period of time of having no credit cards and not making mortgage payments, your credit score will effectively be reduced to 0, which could present problems when it comes to purchasing a home. You certainly could do manual underwriting. There is lenders that are out there that do that, just give yourself some more lead time. It will probably take more time. And we didn’t experience this or get to this point, but I’ve heard — Tim, I don’t know if you’ve heard — that sometimes in a manual underwriting process, you may end up paying a little bit higher of an interest rate.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: So something to balance and think of throughout that process. Tim, want to get your thoughts on this. Lisa says, “I definitely don’t think Step No. 4 should be No. 4.” So No. 4, again, is 15-20% into retirement savings and tax advantage accounts. She said, “It should be closer to No. 1. I have always been taught that saving for retirement as early as possible is a necessity and you should think of that 10-15% money as unusable for anything else. So whatever your net income is, write 10-15% off, and that is your new net income. It’s very easy to push that kind of saving off.” So here she says, “For me, it was more like year one post-graduation, it was Baby Step 2 was immediate, very high interest debt like credit cards.” Then she went to Step No. 4, setting up 401k. Then went to Step 1 and 3 of saving an emergency fund. And then as she went into year two post-grad, she further went into Step 4, saving enough to put max in a Roth IRA, into retirement. And then year three post-graduate, she went back into Step 2 to pay off student loans. So I think the risk that I would have with this — I certainly fundamentally agree with what you talked about before of getting that race to 10%, right? Getting that behavior set up for retirement. But doing that at the expense of any emergency fund, I think you’re putting yourself in a risky situation. Would you agree?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I would. I mean, I probably would put it as, you know, maybe 1a. So I think — you know, I was talking to a prospective client the other day, and I was asking him, you know, if something were to happen from an emergency standpoint, what would you do? And the answer is kind of like, eh, credit card or bank of mom and dad. And I think those are two habits that we probably need to wean off of and break. So I’m always — you know, it’s not the sexiest thing, although I get jacked up every time, you know, an interest rate happens. We’re both Ally proponents. Whenever you get the interest payment in your emergency fund, I think that’s cool. But I’m a big proponent of having some cash set aside for those emergencies and then get serious about at least getting the match. That’s kind of how I view it.

Tim Ulbrich: So as we wrap up this episode, Tim, I think that as we look at this framework, I think you and I would both agree that it’s meant to be exactly that. It’s meant to be a framework, it doesn’t apply to everyone’s personal situation, there’s caveats. And again, I think that speaks to the power of individualized, customized financial planning. And I would highly encourage our listeners, if you’re not a part of the YFP Facebook group, head on over, join the group, there’s great conversation going on on this topic as well as many other topics related to your personal financial plan. And that group is really all about encouraging, motivating and inspiring each other in this community of pharmacists, all committed to being on this path towards achieving financial freedom. So Tim, any last thoughts here on the Ramsey plan as we begin to wrap up the episode here?

refinance student loans

Tim Baker: Yeah, I would just say, we didn’t focus too much on 5, 6 and 7. You know, I would just say that, you know, the whole saving for kids’ college, that’s not a given for a lot of people, even pharmacists that have gone through kind of student loan hell. That doesn’t necessarily mean that they’re in a position or even there’s a want to do that. So that might be something that we can, you know, address a little bit more in the future about different strategies to do that. And I would say paying off the home early, we addressed that a little bit. It also depends, and finally, I think No. 7 is kind of like, you get to the end of this and you’re kind of released out into the wild and to build wealth and everything is good. But you know, for build wealth — for what purpose? You know, I often say that typically the way that I price my services is based on income and net worth, which is great because I’m incentivized to kind of help you grow income and help you grow net worth over time. But if we fast forward 20, 30 years, and you’re sitting on $10 million but you’re miserable because you haven’t done the things that you’ve wanted to do, then that’s not a wealthy life. So I would say build wealth, but to what end. So last year, you know, you did an episode on giving, which is part of kind of 7b in the build wealth and give. But not everyone has that same worldview, so you know, some people are, they want to give 10% right off the bat of their income, you know, even if they have debt. Some people are even if they don’t have debt, they don’t really feel inclined to give. So it’s just different. But I would say that a big one that’s probably missing from here, especially from a pharmacist’s perspective is disability insurance. If you don’t have any coverage at all from an employer, the ability to work and earn really needs to be protected. So that would be one of the things that I would probably edit from a pharmacist’s perspective. But I think it’s a great list, it’s a great template to look at and to build off of and to iterate for your own purposes. So I think this is a great episode because we had a lot of engagement on the Facebook group, and I hope it keeps going because I think people learn when we shine a light on it.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and to your point, I think we’re going to come back and do a lot more on all of these topics, but especially in 5 and 6, you know. We haven’t done a ton on college savings. And that’s an interesting one because I think especially as we think about pharmacists coming out with such high debt loads, I think there’s a tendency, myself included, to maybe put that one at a different priority than it should be because you’re compensating from your own experiences, and you don’t want to put your own children through that. So you know, 529s, ESAs, what’s the strategy? What’s the timing of that? How do you balance that with retirement, your current debt, all those other things? And then as you mentioned, even in Step 6 and the home, how you prioritize that, what’s your interest rates? What’s your other goals related to real estate? What’s your motivation? Do you care about the debt? Do you not? How do the new tax laws impact all of that? We’re going to come and talk more about that into the future. So I think there’s lots of people that are out there listening today, Tim, to this episode, that are thinking of the Ramsey plan, thinking about the framework but are finding themselves spinning their wheels with their own financial plan, lots of competing priorities coming at them, not sure in what order and how this applies to their own personal situation. And as we talked about, this plan is not intended, the Ramsey steps are not intended to be a standalone financial plan. And so I know personally, you have lots of clients who know these steps, maybe some are following them to a T, others are not. But they still value the one-on-one approach in terms of working with you and working with a financial planner. So for those that are listening that want to take that next step, get engaged with you as a financial planner to learn more, what’s the best next step they can do to do that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, Tim, it’s super easy. You can either go to the Your Financial Pharmacist website and click on the “Hire a Planner” tab at the top and then you can schedule a free call on that page. Or just go to ScriptFinancial.com and on the homepage, you’ll see a “Schedule a Free Call” button there. So those are really the two ways to find me and schedule a free call.

Tim Ulbrich: So again, that’s YourFinancialPharmacist.com. You can click on “Hire a Planner,” and then from there, you can schedule a free call with Tim Baker to discuss next steps. So Tim, great to be back on —

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: the podcast with you. Have a great time at the XYPN conference. And we’re certainly looking forward to having you back as we continue with some great content coming forward.

Tim Baker: I’m going to be YFPing this conference. Trending on Twitter.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Love it. Love it. So as we wrap up today’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, I want to take a moment to again thank our sponsor, Splash Financial.

Sponsor: If you’re looking to refinance your student loans, head on over to SplashFinancial.com/YourFinancialPharmacist, where in just a few minutes, you can check your rate. Splash’s new rates are as low as 3.25% fixed APR, which can literally save you tens of thousands of dollars over the life of your loans. Plus, YFP readers receive a $500 welcome bonus for refinancing with Splash. Again, that’s SplashFinancial.com/YourFinancialPharmacist.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you so much for joining Tim Baker and I on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Next week, Tim Church and I will be tag-teaming some updates related to student loans, including the latest on the Public Service Loan Forgiveness program. Also, for those graduates that are getting ready to come out of the grace period and enter active repayment, we will talk about repayment options and strategies. If you like what you heard on this week’s episode, please make sure to subscribe in iTunes or wherever you listen to your podcasts. Also, make sure to head on over to YourFinancialPharmaicst.com, where you will find a wide array of resources designed specifically for you, the pharmacy professional, to help you on the path towards achieving financial freedom. Again, thank you for joining us, and have a great rest of your week.

Join the YFP Community!

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 066: 10 Home Buying Lessons Learned


 

10 Home Buying Lessons Learned

On Episode 066 of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, Tim Ulbrich, Founder of Your Financial Pharmacist, talks through 10 home buying lessons that he learned over the past few months as his family makes the move from Northeast Ohio to Columbus. He shares the good, the bad, and the ugly and hopes these lessons learned will help you in your home buying journey.

Summary of Episode

Tim Ulbrich shares the top ten home buying lessons he’s learned.

  1. DIY route
  2. Read, re-read and understand the fine print
  3. Set your own budget
  4. Ask lots of questions
  5. Put 20% down
  6. Shop around
  7. Consider the total cost of buying a home by including all of the fees
  8. Long-term hidden costs can make a difference
  9. Value of an emergency fund
  10. Have a great team around you

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Welcome to Episode 066 of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. I’m excited to be here, and this week I’m flying solo, following up on the two-part episodes that we did in episodes 064 and 065 with Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPH. And he’s going to be coming back on next week in Episode 067. We’re going to be doing a rapid-fire Q&A all about home buying. So if you have questions related to home buying, make sure you get those questions answered and ask them. You can head on over to the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group or shoot us an email at [email protected], and we’d love to feature your question on the podcast next week in Episode 067.

So this week is all about lessons that my wife, Jess, and I have learned and in some cases, to be frank, mistakes that we’ve made during the home buying process. So we are in the thick of it right now, actually getting ready to move next weekend from northeast Ohio to Columbus, Ohio, so I’m in transition from my job at Northeast Ohio Medical University to Ohio State University. Go Buckeyes! Excited about the opportunities ahead and with this transition, of course, comes selling and buying a home. And so just a few weeks ago, when we were planning this episode, believe it or not, it started as five lessons learned. And it quickly grew to 10. And to be honest, it probably could be many more than that. But that’s just sometimes how it goes. And so this episode is about being transparent, it’s about being honest — I’m not going to hide anything from our listeners — and the reality is, even here, a topic that I feel like I know fairly well, I think this just shows that anything related to personal finance, we’re prone to making mistakes. There’s something to be learned in everything that we do. And obviously, I’m hopeful that these lessons can be passed on to you all in the community and can even help Jess and I as we go through this process again in the future.

So to be honest to the listeners, this process of home buying — and for those of you that have gone through it recently, you know that it can be exciting, it can be emotional, it can be stressful — all of which have a tendency to throw us off of our financial game. And I think when we’re talking about such a large purchase and a home buy, and obviously, the selling aspect of it as well, there’s lots of emotions that can be flying around, lots of excitement, lots of highs, lots of lows. And all of those I think are the more reason that we have to have our financial guard up when it comes to home buying and making sure we’re educated and ready to make the best decisions in this area.

And so a couple reminders that I have before we jump into some background about the move that Jess and I are going through and then I’ll jump into the 10 lessons learned. And if you listened to Episode 064 and 065, we reference that all of the month of September is about home buying. And so along with this month, we’ve developed a YFP first-time home buying quick start guide that you can download for free at YourFinancialPharmacist.com/homeguide. Again, that’s YourFinancialPharmacist.com/homeguide.

OK, so here’s the background. Jess and I have been living in northeast Ohio since 2009, actually neither of us are from this area. I grew up in Buffalo, New York — go Bills — and Jess grew up in the Toledo-Bowling Green area in Perrysburg she spent most of her life, and we’ve been in our current home in Rootstown, Ohio, for eight years. And we actually rented for one year prior to that, so we made the move directly after my year of residency. We came up to northeast Ohio, we’ve been here for nine years. Eight years, we’ve lived in our current home, and we had one year that we rented prior to doing that. Now, when we bought in 2010, we bought with an FHA loan — and you’ve heard us talk about that in episodes 064 and 065. And the main reason we did that is because we didn’t have 20% down for the home. And I’m going to talk about that as we do go through these 10 lessons that are learned. So we only put 3.5% down, which is standard with an FHA loan. At the time, we had lots of student loan debt, as you’ve heard me chronicle my journey before, had no significant emergency fund and had no clue, no idea of the process that’s involved. And ironically, as I look back on that, there was very little stress that was involved with that purchase when in fact, there probably should have been a lot of stress. Very little down, lots of student loan debt, no significant emergency fund, and having really no clue of what was going on and the papers that I was signing. Now, here we are in 2018, we’re moving to Columbus, exciting new job, going to be starting at Ohio State. I have no student loan debt, we’re able to put 20% down, we have a fully funded emergency fund, we’ve got a great retirement account and to start on that retirement. And I think we have a decent, solid understanding of the process. But to be honest, I’m finding it incredibly stressful. And I don’t know if that’s because I’m more aware of what’s going on, I’m more concerned about the places where things can go wrong, maybe I have a little bit of post-traumatic from 2010 and thinking of the things that I could have done better. Whatever the reality is, what I’m fearing right now in the moment as we’re about to close in the next week is I’m feeling a little bit stressed, a little bit anxious and obviously, there’s so many moving parts that go along with this process. And hopefully, we’re going to cover many of these in these lessons learned.

Now, the big difference here in 2018 is that we are both buying and selling. And obviously, all that comes with that and the timing of that can be incredibly stressful. So here’s the deal. At the end of the day, home buying, like any other part of your financial plan, it’s all about being intentional. Being prepared, putting it in the context of the rest of your financial plan, and giving yourself from grace when you make a mistake here or there, and learning from those mistakes and being willing to share those mistakes with others. The only difference here is this is arguably the largest purchase that you’re ever going to make.

And so here we go, 10 lessons that I’ve learned or maybe a better word here would be mistakes or maybe even things that have been reinforced for me as we went through the process back in 2010 and I’m reliving here in 2018.

No. 1, the DIY route, the Do It Yourself route, has saved us a lot of money. BUT, capital B-U-T, is that wow, it has been a lot of work and to be frank with you, I’m not sure if I would do it again. Now, what am I talking about, the DIY route? So No. 1 here, the DIY route has saved us a lot of money, but it’s been a lot of work, and I think it’s added a lot of stress along the way. So what I’m referring to is in terms of the DIY of the sale of our home. Now, the only reason we are doing a for-sale-by-owner is because we literally have somebody in our neighborhood that was interested in buying the home. And so long story short, a few months ago when we were just getting ready to think about putting our home up for sale, we have a Facebook community group that has a, somebody sent out a message and said, ‘Hey, we’ve got somebody in the neighborhood that’s been renting. They’re looking at buying. Is anybody looking at selling their home in the next year?’ Saw the message and said, ‘Well, in fact, we are.’ And so I reached out to them and said, ‘Hey, we’re looking at selling. If you’d love to see the home, we’d love to have you come over and check it out.’ They came over two days later, came back and saw the home another week later, and they said, ‘Hey, we want to buy the home.’ And so obviously at that point, I didn’t feel like we needed to have a realtor in the process to be giving up 6-7% of commissions on the home. And so ultimately, by not having a realtor in the process, that saved approximately $12,000-15,000 if we were to assume a 6-7% realtor fee on the sale price of the home, which is pretty standard. Now, that sounds great, $12,000-15,000, but as I’ve alluded to in the intro to this No. 1 DIY route saved us money, but is it’s been a lot of work, a lot of stress and a lot of ups and downs all the way. And so because we had a neighbor that was looking to buy it, it made sense, we didn’t have to go through the process. We have three young children, so going through that process of listing the home, showing the home, we’ve been through that before and we know how much work that could be. However, as I look back and as we work through the process of making sure the language in the purchase agreement or the contract was in line, looking and finding a title company that we felt comfortable with, being in constant communication between the parties, the different lending agencies, the title company, the sellers — or excuse me, the buyers that are looking at the home, you are that central glue to the process. And really, the thing that I think has got me the most is the uncertainty that can come with this process. And things have literally been in flux from the second we started working with these buyers. And nothing that necessarily is on their back, but they ended up switching lenders because they were having difficulties with one lender, which re-started the entire process, which meant that there was paperwork that had to get re-filed, and ultimately, we are now running up against potentially not having our closing dates align — fingers crossed we’ll hopefully figure that out tomorrow if that’s going to happen. And ultimately, we are so far along the process with them and we have been along the way, and it’s a great opportunity to have them involved so early, but where ultimately it’s at some regards at the whim of what’s going on in their situation, and so that can make things quite different. And now I will say if I did not feel comfortable with working a title company that we had a good connection with, being able to reach out to the Real Estate RPH, Nate Hedrick, with a question here or there, working with my financial planner and YFP team member Tim Baker, obviously all those really help support me along the way. But I think that as I look back on this journey, I’m not sure that I would do it again, although ultimately, it did save us money in the process, so what’s the lesson learned to be here? If you are somebody that is selling your home and you’re looking at the DIY route, make sure that you feel comfortable and understand all the pieces and parts of the process and not just look at what am I going to save by not having a realtor fee, but do you feel comfortable with everything that’s behind you and how might that also impact you on the buying side of things? So that’s lesson learned No. 1.

Lesson learned No. 2 is the importance of reading, re-reading and understanding the fine print. Now, this sounds like common sense, and you’re probably thinking, Tim, come on. You do this all the time, how do you not read the fine print? Now, it’s not that I didn’t read the fine print, I’m actually quite obsessive about reading the fine print. But it’s making sure that you don’t assume things along the way in the fine print and you re-read the fine print. And obviously when you’re going through this process, you’re excited about buying a home, you’re excited about selling a home, you want things to naturally work out, so you have an optimistic lens in which you’re reading things. And so I think that tendency there, at least it was for me, is to not really read to the detail and understand to the detail that you’re asking the tough, probing questions and you’re not making assumptions that somebody else is taking care of it. And so there’s lot of fine print to read. You have the purchase agreement documents, you have a loan estimate documents that will show you as you get closer to close what are all the different fees involved and what you need to bring to the table as you are selling your home, and as you’re buying your home, what you need to bring to the table at the point of close and what are all those fees that are involved and do you understand exactly what that 85-page document says. And if not, are you willing to ask the questions along the way? You know, what a couple examples that I’ve run through along the way here is actually in a home that we were looking at purchasing in Columbus, that ended up falling apart is that there was something in the contract, which come to find out is actually pretty standard in Columbus contracts, that essentially gives the sellers a three-day, 72-hour clause, almost like a seller’s remorse clause. So if for whatever reason within 72 hours the seller decides, you know what, I really don’t want to sell my home because of reason A, B or C, they can pursue that if they issue an attorney letter explaining exactly why they do not want to pursue that, and that ultimately gives them a right out of that contract or at least to have to offer a counter to that, but of course, they could offer something that is egregious and ultimately, you’re not going to be interested in anyway.

So I’m going to give you an example of this is that we were looking at a home in Columbus. And I never knew that a washer and dryer were something that would be such a big deal to a seller. So long story short, in Ohio, it’s pretty standard that your appliances are going to stay with the home, the washer, dryer, that was going to stay, that was in the contract. We were on vacation, we get a call from our real estate agent, who says, ‘Hey, you know what, the buyer — excuse me, the seller really didn’t want to give up their washer and dryer, they didn’t mean to do that. Can they pull it out of the contract?’ And without even thinking much about it, not really objectively thinking, you know what, now we’re going to have to spend money to buy a washer and dryer, wasn’t trying to be a jerk but said no problem, they can keep the washer and dryer. Just add $1,000 toward close and we’ll go out and buy a washer and dryer. Well, that apparently sent the seller off the deep end, and I guess if you love your washer and dryer, you love your washer and dryer, that’s how it is. And they decided to pursue that clause, issue an attorney letter, spent $300-something dollars to do that, and came back with a counter offer that was $20,000 above what we had originally agreed on, which obviously, we were not interested in at that point. And so the lesson there was I read the purchase agreement. I read every detail of it more than once. But I never caught that section and the detail that obviously until it plays out, I thought maybe you can’t even necessarily do that. And so making sure you’re asking questions where you’re confused, you have people around you that can help and support you, and I think what I’ve learned is that by reading the fine print and showing a commitment to your real estate agent if you’re working with one, to the title company, to the lender, the more you are reading, you’re learning, you’re asking questions, I think the more informed buyer that you are, and it keeps all parties accountable and they’re ready to answer your questions because they know they’re probably coming. So No. 2 is the importance of reading the fine print.

No. 3 is a key one. And Nate and I talked a little bit about this in episodes 064 and 065, but I want to reemphasize it here is that you as the buyer set your own budget. Do not let the bank or the lender set your own budget. And I can speak here from firsthand, going through this right now, is that it’s easy to look at a certain range and then you start looking and you think, that would really be nice or this area would be really nice, and all of a sudden, you’re creeping up. And if the lender is setting the budget for you, you’re not going to necessarily really evaluate does the purchase of this home fit within the context and the other financial priorities that I have? It’s a great example that’s right now is that when Jess and I started working with our lender, Wyndham Capital, who has been outstanding, they’ve done a great job, is that they essentially — and this is in part because I think the lending is fairly loose right now because of how good the market is versus where it was, say, 10 years ago after the crash — they pretty much said, I hear what you’re saying, I know what you want, but you can have double that. Or are you sure that you need to or want to sell your current home? Because you know what, you don’t necessarily have to from our end. And so remember, and Nate talked about something called the 28-36 rule that will be used by the lender in determining what they will allow you as a maximum, what they will allow you as a maximum, to take out or to loan. And the 28-36 rule basically says that a household should spend a maximum of 28% of its gross monthly income on total housing expenses, total housing expenses, and no more than 36% on total debt, including housing and other debt such as car loans and other debt that you have as well. So the 28-36 rule, which may be used by a bank to determine what they will allow you or what they will give you in a pre-approval, $400,000, $500,000, $300,000, isn’t necessarily what you should be purchasing in the context of your other financial goals. And this is where it’s really critical to take a step back and say, what other financial priority goals am I trying to achieve? Maybe it’s paying back student loans, maybe it’s paying off credit card debt, saving for retirement, kids’ college, whatever the other things that you’re working towards, and how can I purchase a home in a way that allows me to achieve these other goals? And what is the maximum I am willing to do in terms of that purchase, not what the bank is willing to give to me.

So just quickly, a couple rules of thumb that I really like that you may have heard of before. If you’ve listened to or read any of Dave Ramsey’s stuff, he refers to a mortgage payment — and there’s different variations I’ve heard of this — a mortgage payment — it could be the mortgage alone or it could be the mortgage and insurance, it could be the mortgage, insurance, taxes and interest, so you’ll hear different versions of this — that is no more than 25%, no more than 25%, of your take-home pay. So if your monthly take-home pay is $8,000, this rule of thumb would say that your mortgage payment, and if you want to be conservative, with taxes, with insurance, with interest, your total monthly payment would be no more than $2,000 if you had an $8,000 take-home pay. Now, what that’s trying to do is prevent you from becoming or feeling like you’re house-poor. So if you have other goals that you’re trying to work on and achieve, you know then that no more than 25% of your take-home pay is going toward your home. Therefore, you’ll be able to achieve your other goals. Now, that’s a great general rule of thumb, but some of you maybe listening have no student loan debt, others of you may have $200,000 of student loan debt plus credit card debt plus very little progress on retirement, and obviously, those two situations would be very different. And so you need to evaluate this on a case-by-case basis.

Another rule of thumb is from the book, “The Millionaire Next Door,” by Tom Stanley says that no more than 2x your household income on the purchase price of a home. So if you have a household income of say $150,000, no more than $300,000 on the purchase of your home. Again, that’s trying to get to this idea of preventing you from becoming house-poor. And I cannot emphasize right now for those of you that are looking at buying in this moment, the lending right now — and I’ve experienced this firsthand — is pretty loose, meaning that you as a pharmacist with a good income, a good, stable earning potential, I think you’re going to find that the bank is willing to give you much more home than you probably need to have and that you probably want in terms of the other goals that you’re trying to achieve. And so what I really encourage you to do is zoom out of the lens of just the monthly payment and look at the total payout of what this home is going to cost you. So as one example, if you were to have a purchase price of a home around a $350,000 with mortgage, taxes, insurance, assuming a 30-year home with about a 4.5% interest rate, it’d be about a monthly payment of $1,900 a month for 30 years. If you do the math, that $350,000 home over the course of 30 years, you’re going to pay out about $684,000. Now, it doesn’t mean it’s a bad decision. It may be a great decision, depending on the other financial goals and what you’re trying to achieve, but looking beyond just the monthly payment also helps you look at this in a different way and evaluate how does this fit in with the other goals that you’re trying to achieve.

So No. 3 here is set your own budget, it’s a great reminder. Jess and I had this reminder this year, especially as the lending is loose. Don’t let the bank set the budget for you.

No. 4 is ask lots and lots and lots of questions. And I alluded to this a little bit in No. 2, but Jess and I have experienced this firsthand is that you want to be respectfully annoying. Be respectfully annoying because I think asking questions and showing a desire to learn, as I mentioned before, keeps all parties — the title agency, the loan officers, the lenders, everyone that you’re working with — let’s them know that you have a desire to learn, let’s them know that you’re ready, you’re invested, and I think it keeps people more accountable along the way. And I’ve had several individuals in this process, everyone from the loan officer to the title agency say, ‘You know what, I can tell that you’re really interested in this, and I usually don’t get these types of questions.’ And I think ultimately, I want them to know that I’m probably going to be asking questions. I think that helps them give me a more detailed and thorough response, also helps keep them accountable to make sure that they are giving the attention due to the process that is going along the way.

And I think this is really true of anything, whether it’s a home, a car, any major purchase that you’re making, an educated buyer, I truly believe, is going to get the best value along the way. And so just a few examples that we have in the lesson learned of the value of asking lots of questions is by asking lots of questions along the way, this has allowed us to negotiate and reduce title fees that actually identified an error in a property tax calculation that got corrected — and maybe that would have probably been identified anyways, but that question really helped identify that, and obviously that led to a reduction in what will be our future monthly payment. And for us, most importantly, as those two examples I just gave you are short-term savings, is that it helped us ensure we understood the process and we know exactly what we’re paying for. So whether it’s cost at closing or whether it’s when we send in that monthly payment each and every month, I know exactly where that money is going each and every month. And I think obviously that is powerful in and of itself, but I think it’s valuable just to know going into the future when we do this again or as we’re helping guide others in the process as well, knowing where that money is going, I think obviously is going to help motivate us to eventually get this paid off and turn this liability into an asset.

OK, so No. 4 is asking lots of questions.

No. 5, I’ve hit on this many times on the podcast and in blog posts, is the importance of 20% down. Now, no judgment here. I’m speaking from making this mistake back in 2010, I alluded to that at the beginning of the episode. Jess and I put 3.5% down through an FHA loan, and to be frank with you, we were paying for that for many years — really up until probably the last year because the reality is the way the mortgage is constructed with interest, it takes so long to build up equity in a home. And so to me, there’s lots of reasons to have 20% down on a home. Instantly, you have equity in the home. So if something like 2008 were to happen and the housing market would flip, you’re not likely to be underwater on your mortgage. Or what if you go to sell unexpectedly in two years because of a job change? And maybe you thought you’d be there 10, 15 or 20, you could build up equity, but you’re not for whatever reason or something unexpected happens. Now, you may not have enough equity in the home to cover all the costs associated with selling that home. And obviously then, you’re going to need additional funds to bring to the table to cover those costs.

Other advantages of 20% down — obviously, no Private Mortgage Insurance, we’ve talked about that, PMI, which is foreclosure insurance. You don’t have restrictions that are associated with loans like an FHA loan, which is in terms of how that PMI is structured and how you’re going to pay it, more stringent inspections and appraisal processes. And I think obviously, 20% down just keeps it simple. No PMI, no restrictions on how that loan is being structured, a cleaner inspection, appraisal process, you’re not trying to buy points in the process and trying to eventually get your PMI reduced. It makes a conventional loan purchase process incredibly simple, and I think it makes you an attractive customer to the lender. That’s something I heard over and over again from the lender that we’re working with, Wyndham Capital said, ‘You know what, you’re a great buyer. And we’re glad to be working with you,’ and I think it’s because of that 20% down, they obviously feel very comfortable with that conventional loan.

Now, the other thing I think 20% down really does — and again, I’m speaking here out of a personal mistake — is that it forces you down in the expectation of the home that you’re buying. It forces you down in the expectation of the home that you’re buying. Now what do I mean by that? If Jess and I right now were to say, ‘You know, we really want to buy a $500,000 home,’ if we stayed committed to 20% down, that would mean we have to come up with $100,000 in cash to be able to go to closing at that home plus the closing costs on top of that. Now, if we don’t have $100,000 equity in our current home or we’re buying for the first time, that obviously is going to take a lot of time to build up $100,000 of cash to be able to close on that home. So I think what that does if you stay committed to 20% down, you say, you know what, maybe that’s a $250,000 home. Maybe that’s a $300,000 home. Maybe less than that or maybe slightly more than that, depending on the market that you’re living in, will allow you to potentially buy down on the home, whereas if you go into a 0% down loan or a 3.5% down loan where you have to bring very little, if any, cash to the table, obviously I think it’s much easier to buy up on home and find yourself in the situation where you feel house-poor.

refinance student loans

So 20% was the lesson learned No. 5, and I think here, this is an important point where you really have to evaluate, am I rushing to buy a home? Should I stay in a rent situation for longer? Should I buy? We have talked about this at great length, and what I would reference you to and will link to in the show notes is the New York Times has a great rent v. buy calculator that really helps you look at this in an apples-to-apples way in the best that you can to make the comparison. Because I know the trap that I fell into was well, I’m paying $1,100 a month for rent, my mortgage with taxes and with insurance is going be $1,100 a month. Why wouldn’t I buy a home and build up some equity? And the reality I learned, which is an obvious one now looking back is that I was really building very little, if any, equity because of how the loan was structured and because I had almost nothing down and I forgot to include all those other fees on top of that in terms of the maintenance and everything that comes with the home that easily is upwards of 30-50% of the mortgage payment by itself.

So before we jump into points 6-10, I want to take a quick break and just re-emphasize something we talked about in episodes 064 and 065 is that if you are looking to buy or sell a home, get started in real estate investing or have a question that you want to have answered by a licensed real estate agent that is also a pharmacist, make sure to head on over to YourFinancialPharmaicst.com/realestateRPH to get in touch with Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPH. Again, that’s YourFinancialPharmaicst.com/realestateRPH. And you can submit your question. We have a few details and information to fill out, and he will respond to you as soon as possible. Again, we’ll have him back on in Episode 067 for the rapid-fire Q&A on home buying.

OK, so points 1-5, we covered lessons learned. No. 6 is shop around. Shop around for title companies that you’re working with if your contract allows that, shop around for the lender that you’re going to work with, but be careful how you do it. So lesson learned No. 6, shop around, but be careful how you do it. Now, why am I saying be careful how you do it? So I made a mistake — and I alluded to this on Episode 065 — I made the mistake of saying, I’d really like to see this tool that’s out there now advertised called Lending Tree becuase if it’s a good tool to compare for lenders, rather than just depending on the local bank or a lender that I’ve worked with previously, I’d love to be able to share that with the YFP community. Now, I’m glad I tested that first because honestly, I would not recommend that you use a tool like Lending Tree because I submitted my information, and literally for about a month-long period of time, I was getting phone calls and voice messages all day long of lenders trying to get ahold of me, even long after I selected a lender. And so I think that the point here is a good one is shopping around and not just depending on one lending quote or one title company, whatever you’re working with, one real estate agent, is really shopping around will allow you to look at multiple options just like you would with any other major purchase. However, do not just focus on the price when it comes to a title company or an insurance quote that you’re getting or a commission that you’re going to pay a real estate agent or a rate that you’re going to pay a lending company on your loan. That certainly is a critically important factor, but you need to make sure you’re looking at the other components like are they easy to work with? Are they communicative? Are they responsive? Do they have a good reputation? Because I can tell you from this process over the last month, all of these individuals I’ve been in touch with, on some weeks on a daily basis. And so working with one lending agency that’s going to give you a 4.55% rate versus another that’s going to give you a 4.6% rate, but one’s not going to respond to you as much or not going to close on time, they’re going to cause you a lot of headaches, you have to really evaluate is it worth it? And obviously, if you can get the best of both worlds, that’s the place to go. And so making sure you’re shopping around for all these different areas, making sure you know what is and is not neogtiable, I think is a great lesson to be learned, certainly one that I’ve learned. But be careful how you do it in terms of getting multiple quotes.

Lesson No. 7 is make sure to consider all of the total costs and fees that are associated with buying a home — and if you’re selling a home, obviously that’s associated with the selling as well. And to be fair and to be honest, don’t be surprised by a few more that come along the way. And there was sometimes I would look at documents, and just this past week, I was looking at our loan estimate closing documents, and all this laundry list of title fees and no explanation of what they are. And they ended up being legitimate fees, but again, back to being an educated buyer, making sure you’re asking questions, making sure you’re trying to compare one of these to another if you’re looking at shopping around with two different companies, but I think what tends to happen when you’re buying a home is you hone in on the sale price of the home alone. So ooh, that home’s at $350,000, it’s within our budget. Great, that is certainly an important factor, but what about all of the other fees that are involved.

Now, if you’re just buying a home, as Nate mentioned on the previous episodes, there’s really no realtor fees that are involved because of how they’re absorbed by the seller, so that’s simplified somewhat. However, when you’re on the selling end, you obviously have the realtor fees, which can be 5-7%, roughly, of the sale of the home. And depending on the purchase agreement, you may be responsible for some of those at the buyer’s expense. And obviously, that can vary from state to state, region to region, purchase ot purchase. You’ve got the down payment on the home, you’ve got the appraisal cost, you’ve got inspection, you’ve got title fees, you’ve got prepaids at close in terms of homeowners insurance and mortgage insurance if you don’t have 20% down, and property taxes and HOA fees. You’ve got moving fees, right? So if you have to pick up and move across the state or across the country, are you going to hire a mover? Are you going to do it yourself? Are you going to have them pack? Are you not going to have them pack? And of course, you have the transitionary fees. So as you’re in the pack-up phase, you’re probably eating out more, you’re taking trips to Lowe’s to fix things on your current home before you sell if that’s the case or when you’re buying a home, when you get there to do some quick home improvements. So really set out and not just look at the purchase price and say, ‘OK, we got to 20% down or whatever our goal is.’ But look at all of the costs that are involved with the purchase along the way.

And prior to this episode, I sent a note out to our Facebook group to say, hey, what are some of the lessons that you’ve learned along the way when it comes to home buying. And I like what Wes said in terms of ‘be wary of what’s called a special assessment fee in a new neighborhood. Typically, it’s a fee being applied to each homeowner for the cost of development of the new neighborhood. Think bonds taken out by the municipality that include interest that then are being applied equally to each new homeowner for a period of time, say it’s 10 years.’ So Wes, thank you for contributing. For those of you that are not yet a part of the YFP Facebook group, we’d love to have you join. And I think that’s just an example of this laundry list of fees and miscellaneous fees and more fees that can come along the way. And I think the lesson that Jess and I learned is we are so focused on the sale price and so focused at getting that 20% down, thankfully, we had some buffer beyond our six-month emergency fund, our 3-6 months emergency fund to cover some of these other costs. But making sure you’re really looking at the entire picture of all fees that are involved. So that’s No. 7 is consider all the costs.

No. 8, the lesson learned here is the long-term “hidden costs” when buying a home that can make a difference. Now, I’m not talking about the transactional cost, I’m talking about the long-term hidden costs beyond what I just covered in lesson No. 7. So here, we’re talking beyond the sale price, beyond the transaction costs. So what I’m referring to here are things like property taxes, homeowner’s insurance, HOA fees, local income tax if that is applicable or not. And so I think here that again, another area you tend to focus, I know we tend to focus, on the sale price of a home. But in reality, from one neighborhood to another in the same city, your property taxes could be different by $2,000-3,000 a year. Well, that has a huge impact on your monthly payment. Or homeowner’s insurance that you’re going to be paying each and every month, each and every year. Or does the development have HOA fees or not? Does the city have a 1-2% local income tax or not that you’re going to be paying each and every year? These are the long-term, what I call hidden costs that — not saying you necessarily wnat to avoid these because there could be great reasons for being in an area that has these: great schools, great community, great neighborhoods, etc. — but making sure you’re aware of these and how they’re going to contribute to your monthly payment and making sure you’ll be able to stay within budget and to achieve your other financial goals.

And Brittany from the Facebook group here says that, ‘Upkeep costs of one home versus another for sure. So we have two acres and a pool. Upkeep is quite pricy.’ And I think that’s great is if you’re looking at two very different styles of home that’s on land, a home that’s not on land, a home that has a pool, a home that does not have a pool, or any other factor like that, what is going to be the upkeep differences and making sure you’re acounting for those and how that may fit into your monthly budget, obviously those factors being beyond your monthly payment.

No. 9, Jess and I have learned this firsthand, we are feeling it right now, is the value of having a solid emergency fund in place when you’re making these big purchases. So we’ve talked many times before on this podcast and the blog, 3-6 months of expenses in a long-term savings account set aside to cover a job loss or some other emergency fund, and I think it goes without saying that here, when you’re making a massive purchase, you’re in a transitionary period of time, a solid emergency fund in place gives you peace of mind that if something goes wrong on either end, if you’re buying or selling, or you have some backup there during a transition, if you have a gap of employment, as I mentioned, something goes wrong, the peace of mind here can not be traded in terms of what a solid emergency fund will bring. And so I’m a big advocate of, again, 20% down, a solid emergecny fund, neither of which Jess and I did on our first purchase, both of which we’re doing now, brings an incredible amount of peace and I think reduces anxiety during that transitionary period.

And finally, lesson learned No. 10 is the importance of having a good team around you. Now, I mentioned at the very beginning, lesson No. 1, that we’ve taken the DIY for-sale-by-owner approach because we had essentially a buyer approach us in our neighborhood. And so we don’t have the real estate agent involved in the process. However, as I alluded to, if I had to do it all over again, even with a known buyer, I would question that decision, although it’s had great value. And so here, a great team around you, I’m referring to a real estate agent that is transparent, that is acting in your best interests, that you know and that you trust; a good financial planner that knows your situation and that can keep you accountable in this process. So for Jess and I, Tim Baker is a phone call away, and I called him just a couple weeks ago because we were having some potential issues and still are potentially with closing dates to say, hey, what are the options? Help talk me through this. What am I not thinking about? What are my blind spots? And I think for such an emotional, big decision, having a financial planner on your team that can say, hey, does this fit in the context of all these other things that we talked about? Or what if we waited three more months? Or maybe it’s the right time, but what about this or that? Somebody to keep you and/or a spouse accountable through this process is incredibly important. Obviously, you have the lender, the title company, this team is one that you’re going to be communicating with regularly. And Nate alluded to this on previous episodes, making sure you have this team ready to go and knows exactly what your priorities are before you get started in the process.

So there you have it, 10 lessons learned that are reinforced or in some cases, mistakes that we’ve made through this process. And we’re not fully through it yet. So we’ve got a couple weeks. Hopefully at the end of this month, we’re going to be moving into the home in Columbus. We’re in the final processes of getting paperwork signed, closing date’s hopefully this Friday, early next week. And so stay tuned; I may have more stories to share — successes, mistakes along the way. Again, that’s what this is all about, hopefully helping you learn through the process as well and I’m hoping through these lessons, you can save yourself some headaches and do this in a better way or potentially even share some of your own stories with others as well.

So as a reminder as we wrap up here, again, along with this month-long series, we have a YFP first-time home buying quick start guide that you can download at YourFinancialPharmacist.com/homeguide. Again, that’s YourFinancialPharmacist.com/homeguide. And as we wrap up this episode of the podcast, I want to take a moment to again thank our sponsor of today’s show, Common Bond.

Sponsor: Common Bond is on a mission to provide a more transparent, simple, and affordable way to manage higher education expenses. Their approach is no big secret. Lower rates, simpler options, and a world-class experience, all built to support you throughout your student loan journey. Since its founding, Common Bond has funded over $2 billion in student loans. This is the only student loan company to offer a true one-for-one social promise. What that means is that for every loan Common Bond funds, they also fund the education of a child in the developing world through its partnership with Pencils of Promise. So right now, as a member of the YFP community, you can get a $500 cash bonus when you refinance through the link YourFinancialPharmacist.com/commonbond. Again, that’s YourFinancialPharmacist.com/commonbond.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you so much for joining me today. I look forward to next week’s episode where we’ll bring Nate, the Real Estate RPH, back on to do a rapid-fire Q&A on home buying. Have a great rest of your week.

Join the YFP Community!

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]